</ul>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note1" href="#note1">1)</a> This International Standard is designed to promote the portability of C programs among a variety of
data-processing systems. It is intended for use by implementors and programmers.
</small>
<!--page 21 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note2" href="#note2">2)</a> A strictly conforming program can use conditional features (such as those in <a href="#F">annex F</a>) provided the
use is guarded by a #ifdef directive with the appropriate macro. For example:
<!--page 23 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note5" href="#note5">5)</a> Implementations shall behave as if these separate phases occur, even though many are typically folded
together in practice. Source files, translation units, and translated translation units need not
necessarily be stored as files, nor need there be any one-to-one correspondence between these entities
as being both a constraint error and resulting in undefined behavior, the constraint error shall be diagnosed.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note8" href="#note8">8)</a> The intent is that an implementation should identify the nature of, and where possible localize, each
violation. Of course, an implementation is free to produce any number of diagnostics as long as a
valid program is still correctly translated. It may also successfully translate an invalid program.
startup and program termination.
</ul>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note9" href="#note9">9)</a> Thus, int can be replaced by a typedef name defined as int, or the type of argv can be written as
char ** argv, and so on.
</small>
termination status returned to the host environment is unspecified.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: definition of terms (<a href="#7.1.1">7.1.1</a>), the exit function (<a href="#7.20.4.3">7.20.4.3</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note10" href="#note10">10)</a> In accordance with <a href="#6.2.4">6.2.4</a>, the lifetimes of objects with automatic storage duration declared in main
will have ended in the former case, even where they would not have in the latter.
</small>
signal function (<a href="#7.14">7.14</a>), files (<a href="#7.19.3">7.19.3</a>).
<!--page 29 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note11" href="#note11">11)</a> The IEC 60559 standard for binary floating-point arithmetic requires certain user-accessible status
flags and control modes. Floating-point operations implicitly set the status flags; modes affect result
values of floating-point operations. Implementations that support such floating-point state are
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note12" href="#note12">12)</a> The trigraph sequences enable the input of characters that are not defined in the Invariant Code Set as
described in ISO/IEC 646, which is a subset of the seven-bit US ASCII code set.
</small>
<li> 63 levels of nested structure or union definitions in a single struct-declaration-list
</ul>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note13" href="#note13">13)</a> Implementations should avoid imposing fixed translation limits whenever possible.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note14" href="#note14">14)</a> See ''future language directions'' (<a href="#6.11.3">6.11.3</a>).
UCHAR_MAX.<sup><a href="#note15"><b>15)</b></a></sup> The value UCHAR_MAX shall equal 2<sup>CHAR_BIT</sup> - 1.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: representations of types (<a href="#6.2.6">6.2.6</a>), conditional inclusion (<a href="#6.10.1">6.10.1</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note15" href="#note15">15)</a> See <a href="#6.2.5">6.2.5</a>.
</small>
LDBL_MIN 1E-37
</pre>
</ul>
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 12 -->
Conversion from (at least) double to decimal with DECIMAL_DIG digits and back
should be the identity function.
(<a href="#7.20">7.20</a>), input/output <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a> (<a href="#7.19">7.19</a>), mathematics <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a> (<a href="#7.12">7.12</a>).
<!--page 41 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note16" href="#note16">16)</a> The floating-point model is intended to clarify the description of each floating-point characteristic and
does not require the floating-point arithmetic of the implementation to be identical.
</small>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: declarations (<a href="#6.7">6.7</a>), expressions (<a href="#6.5">6.5</a>), external definitions (<a href="#6.9">6.9</a>),
statements (<a href="#6.8">6.8</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note21" href="#note21">21)</a> There is no linkage between different identifiers.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note22" href="#note22">22)</a> A function declaration can contain the storage-class specifier static only if it is at file scope; see
<!--page 44 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note24" href="#note24">24)</a> There is only one name space for tags even though three are possible.
</small>
<!--page 45 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note25" href="#note25">25)</a> The term ''constant address'' means that two pointers to the object constructed at possibly different
times will compare equal. The address may be different during two different executions of the same
program.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: compatible type and composite type (<a href="#6.2.7">6.2.7</a>), declarations (<a href="#6.7">6.7</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note28" href="#note28">28)</a> Implementation-defined keywords shall have the form of an identifier reserved for any use as
described in <a href="#7.1.3">7.1.3</a>.
</small>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: declarations (<a href="#6.7">6.7</a>), expressions (<a href="#6.5">6.5</a>), lvalues, arrays, and function
designators (<a href="#6.3.2.1">6.3.2.1</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note40" href="#note40">40)</a> A positional representation for integers that uses the binary digits 0 and 1, in which the values
represented by successive bits are additive, begin with 1, and are multiplied by successive integral
powers of 2, except perhaps the bit with the highest position. (Adapted from the American National
<!--page 52 -->
for signed integer types the width is one greater than the precision.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note44" href="#note44">44)</a> Some combinations of padding bits might generate trap representations, for example, if one padding
bit is a parity bit. Regardless, no arithmetic operation on valid values can generate a trap
representation other than as part of an exceptional condition such as an overflow, and this cannot occur
int f(int (*)(char *), double (*)[3]);
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note46" href="#note46">46)</a> Two types need not be identical to be compatible.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note47" href="#note47">47)</a> As specified in <a href="#6.2.1">6.2.1</a>, the later declaration might hide the prior declaration.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: enumeration specifiers (<a href="#6.7.2.2">6.7.2.2</a>), structure and union specifiers
(<a href="#6.7.2.1">6.7.2.1</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note48" href="#note48">48)</a> The integer promotions are applied only: as part of the usual arithmetic conversions, to certain
argument expressions, to the operands of the unary +, -, and ~ operators, and to both operands of the
shift operators, as specified by their respective subclauses.
Otherwise, the new type is signed and the value cannot be represented in it; either the
result is implementation-defined or an implementation-defined signal is raised.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note49" href="#note49">49)</a> The rules describe arithmetic on the mathematical value, not the value of a given type of expression.
</small>
in an implementation-defined manner. If the value being converted is outside the range of
values that can be represented, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note50" href="#note50">50)</a> The remaindering operation performed when a value of integer type is converted to unsigned type
need not be performed when a value of real floating type is converted to unsigned type. Thus, the
range of portable real floating values is (-1, Utype_MAX+1).
<!--page 58 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note51" href="#note51">51)</a> For example, addition of a double _Complex and a float entails just the conversion of the
float operand to double (and yields a double _Complex result).
</small>
<!--page 59 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note53" href="#note53">53)</a> The name ''lvalue'' comes originally from the assignment expression E1 = E2, in which the left
operand E1 is required to be a (modifiable) lvalue. It is perhaps better considered as representing an
object ''locator value''. What is sometimes called ''rvalue'' is in this International Standard described
capable of holding object pointers (<a href="#7.18.1.4">7.18.1.4</a>), simple assignment (<a href="#6.5.16.1">6.5.16.1</a>).
<!--page 61 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note55" href="#note55">55)</a> The macro NULL is defined in <a href="#7.17"><stddef.h></a> (and other headers) as a null pointer constant; see <a href="#7.17">7.17</a>.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note56" href="#note56">56)</a> The mapping functions for converting a pointer to an integer or an integer to a pointer are intended to
</small>
<h3><a name="6.4" href="#6.4">6.4 Lexical elements</a></h3>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
token:
punctuator
each non-white-space character that cannot be one of the above
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each preprocessing token that is converted to a token shall have the lexical form of a
keyword, an identifier, a constant, a string literal, or a punctuator.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
A token is the minimal lexical element of the language in translation phases 7 and 8. The
categories of tokens are: keywords, identifiers, constants, string literals, and punctuators.
(<a href="#6.5.3.1">6.5.3.1</a>), preprocessing directives (<a href="#6.10">6.10</a>), preprocessing numbers (<a href="#6.4.8">6.4.8</a>), string literals
(<a href="#6.4.5">6.4.5</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note58" href="#note58">58)</a> An additional category, placemarkers, is used internally in translation phase 4 (see <a href="#6.10.3.3">6.10.3.3</a>); it cannot
occur in source files.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.4.1" href="#6.4.1">6.4.1 Keywords</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
keyword: one of
double long typedef
else register union
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The above tokens (case sensitive) are reserved (in translation phases 7 and 8) for use as
keywords, and shall not be used otherwise. The keyword _Imaginary is reserved for
<!--page 63 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note59" href="#note59">59)</a> One possible specification for imaginary types appears in <a href="#G">annex G</a>.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.4.2" href="#6.4.2">6.4.2 Identifiers</a></h4>
<h5><a name="6.4.2.1" href="#6.4.2.1">6.4.2.1 General</a></h5>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
identifier:
digit: one of
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
An identifier is a sequence of nondigit characters (including the underscore _, the
lowercase and uppercase Latin letters, and other characters) and digits, which designates
<!--page 64 -->
-<h6>Implementation limits</h6>
+<p><b>Implementation limits</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
As discussed in <a href="#5.2.4.1">5.2.4.1</a>, an implementation may limit the number of significant initial
characters in an identifier; the limit for an external name (an identifier that has external
identifiers differ only in nonsignificant characters, the behavior is undefined.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: universal character names (<a href="#6.4.3">6.4.3</a>), macro replacement (<a href="#6.10.3">6.10.3</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note60" href="#note60">60)</a> On systems in which linkers cannot accept extended characters, an encoding of the universal character
name may be used in forming valid external identifiers. For example, some otherwise unused
character or sequence of characters may be used to encode the \u in a universal character name.
</small>
<h5><a name="6.4.2.2" href="#6.4.2.2">6.4.2.2 Predefined identifiers</a></h5>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The identifier __func__ shall be implicitly declared by the translator as if,
immediately following the opening brace of each function definition, the declaration
<!--page 65 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note61" href="#note61">61)</a> Since the name __func__ is reserved for any use by the implementation (<a href="#7.1.3">7.1.3</a>), if any other
identifier is explicitly declared using the name __func__, the behavior is undefined.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.4.3" href="#6.4.3">6.4.3 Universal character names</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
universal-character-name:
hexadecimal-digit hexadecimal-digit
hexadecimal-digit hexadecimal-digit
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A universal character name shall not specify a character whose short identifier is less than
00A0 other than 0024 ($), 0040 (@), or 0060 ('), nor one in the range D800 through
DFFF inclusive.<sup><a href="#note62"><b>62)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
Universal character names may be used in identifiers, character constants, and string
literals to designate characters that are not in the basic character set.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The universal character name \Unnnnnnnn designates the character whose eight-digit
short identifier (as specified by ISO/IEC 10646) is nnnnnnnn.<sup><a href="#note63"><b>63)</b></a></sup> Similarly, the universal
<!--page 66 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note62" href="#note62">62)</a> The disallowed characters are the characters in the basic character set and the code positions reserved
by ISO/IEC 10646 for control characters, the character DELETE, and the S-zone (reserved for use by
UTF-16).
</small>
<h4><a name="6.4.4" href="#6.4.4">6.4.4 Constants</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
constant:
enumeration-constant
character-constant
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each constant shall have a type and the value of a constant shall be in the range of
representable values for its type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
Each constant has a type, determined by its form and value, as detailed later.
<h5><a name="6.4.4.1" href="#6.4.4.1">6.4.4.1 Integer constants</a></h5>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 67 -->
<pre>
long-long-suffix: one of
ll LL
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
An integer constant begins with a digit, but has no period or exponent part. It may have a
prefix that specifies its base and a suffix that specifies its type.
digits 0 through 7 only. A hexadecimal constant consists of the prefix 0x or 0X followed
by a sequence of the decimal digits and the letters a (or A) through f (or F) with values
10 through 15 respectively.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The value of a decimal constant is computed base 10; that of an octal constant, base 8;
that of a hexadecimal constant, base 16. The lexically first digit is the most significant.
<!--page 69 -->
<h5><a name="6.4.4.2" href="#6.4.4.2">6.4.4.2 Floating constants</a></h5>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 70 -->
<pre>
floating-suffix: one of
f l F L
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A floating constant has a significand part that may be followed by an exponent part and a
suffix that specifies its type. The components of the significand part may include a digit
e, E, p, or P followed by an exponent consisting of an optionally signed digit sequence.
Either the whole-number part or the fraction part has to be present; for decimal floating
constants, either the period or the exponent part has to be present.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The significand part is interpreted as a (decimal or hexadecimal) rational number; the
digit sequence in the exponent part is interpreted as a decimal integer. For decimal
Floating constants are converted to internal format as if at translation-time. The
conversion of a floating constant shall not raise an exceptional condition or a floating-
point exception at execution time.
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
The implementation should produce a diagnostic message if a hexadecimal constant
cannot be represented exactly in its evaluation format; the implementation should then
<!--page 71 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note64" href="#note64">64)</a> The specification for the library functions recommends more accurate conversion than required for
floating constants (see <a href="#7.20.1.3">7.20.1.3</a>).
</small>
<h5><a name="6.4.4.3" href="#6.4.4.3">6.4.4.3 Enumeration constants</a></h5>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
enumeration-constant:
identifier
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
An identifier declared as an enumeration constant has type int.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: enumeration specifiers (<a href="#6.7.2.2">6.7.2.2</a>).
<h5><a name="6.4.4.4" href="#6.4.4.4">6.4.4.4 Character constants</a></h5>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 72 -->
<pre>
\x hexadecimal-digit
hexadecimal-escape-sequence hexadecimal-digit
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
An integer character constant is a sequence of one or more multibyte characters enclosed
in single-quotes, as in 'x'. A wide character constant is the same, except prefixed by the
<!--page 73 -->
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 9 -->
The value of an octal or hexadecimal escape sequence shall be in the range of
representable values for the type unsigned char for an integer character constant, or
the unsigned type corresponding to wchar_t for a wide character constant.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 10 -->
An integer character constant has type int. The value of an integer character constant
containing a single character that maps to a single-byte execution character is the
(<a href="#7.20.7.2">7.20.7.2</a>).
<!--page 74 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note65" href="#note65">65)</a> The semantics of these characters were discussed in <a href="#5.2.2">5.2.2</a>. If any other character follows a backslash,
the result is not a token and a diagnostic is required. See ''future language directions'' (<a href="#6.11.4">6.11.4</a>).
</small>
<h4><a name="6.4.5" href="#6.4.5">6.4.5 String literals</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
string-literal:
the double-quote ", backslash \, or new-line character
escape-sequence
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A character string literal is a sequence of zero or more multibyte characters enclosed in
double-quotes, as in "xyz". A wide string literal is the same, except prefixed by the
character constant, except that the single-quote ' is representable either by itself or by the
escape sequence \', but the double-quote " shall be represented by the escape sequence
\".
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
In translation phase 6, the multibyte character sequences specified by any sequence of
adjacent character and wide string literal tokens are concatenated into a single multibyte
<p><b> Forward references</b>: common definitions <a href="#7.17"><stddef.h></a> (<a href="#7.17">7.17</a>), the mbstowcs
function (<a href="#7.20.8.1">7.20.8.1</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note66" href="#note66">66)</a> A character string literal need not be a string (see <a href="#7.1.1">7.1.1</a>), because a null character may be embedded in
it by a \0 escape sequence.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.4.6" href="#6.4.6">6.4.6 Punctuators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
punctuator: one of
, # ##
<: :> <% %> %: %:%:
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A punctuator is a symbol that has independent syntactic and semantic significance.
Depending on context, it may specify an operation to be performed (which in turn may
<p><b> Forward references</b>: expressions (<a href="#6.5">6.5</a>), declarations (<a href="#6.7">6.7</a>), preprocessing directives
(<a href="#6.10">6.10</a>), statements (<a href="#6.8">6.8</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note67" href="#note67">67)</a> These tokens are sometimes called ''digraphs''.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note68" href="#note68">68)</a> Thus [ and <: behave differently when ''stringized'' (see <a href="#6.10.3.2">6.10.3.2</a>), but can otherwise be freely
</small>
<h4><a name="6.4.7" href="#6.4.7">6.4.7 Header names</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
header-name:
any member of the source character set except
the new-line character and "
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The sequences in both forms of header names are mapped in an implementation-defined
manner to headers or external source file names as specified in <a href="#6.10.2">6.10.2</a>.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: source file inclusion (<a href="#6.10.2">6.10.2</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note69" href="#note69">69)</a> Thus, sequences of characters that resemble escape sequences cause undefined behavior.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note70" href="#note70">70)</a> For an example of a header name preprocessing token used in a #pragma directive, see <a href="#6.10.9">6.10.9</a>.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.4.8" href="#6.4.8">6.4.8 Preprocessing numbers</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
pp-number:
pp-number P sign
pp-number .
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A preprocessing number begins with a digit optionally preceded by a period (.) and may
be followed by valid identifier characters and the character sequences e+, e-, E+, E-,
p+, p-, P+, or P-.
<p><!--para 3 -->
Preprocessing number tokens lexically include all floating and integer constant tokens.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
A preprocessing number does not have type or a value; it acquires both after a successful
conversion (as part of translation phase 7) to a floating constant token or an integer
<!--page 79 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note71" href="#note71">71)</a> Thus, /* ... */ comments do not nest.
</small>
<!--page 81 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note72" href="#note72">72)</a> A floating-point status flag is not an object and can be set more than once within an expression.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note73" href="#note73">73)</a> This paragraph renders undefined statement expressions such as
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.1" href="#6.5.1">6.5.1 Primary expressions</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
primary-expression:
string-literal
( expression )
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
An identifier is a primary expression, provided it has been declared as designating an
object (in which case it is an lvalue) or a function (in which case it is a function
designator, or a void expression.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: declarations (<a href="#6.7">6.7</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note79" href="#note79">79)</a> Thus, an undeclared identifier is a violation of the syntax.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.2" href="#6.5.2">6.5.2 Postfix operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
postfix-expression:
</pre>
<h5><a name="6.5.2.1" href="#6.5.2.1">6.5.2.1 Array subscripting</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
One of the expressions shall have type ''pointer to object type'', the other expression shall
have integer type, and the result has type ''type''.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A postfix expression followed by an expression in square brackets [] is a subscripted
designation of an element of an array object. The definition of the subscript operator []
<!--page 83 -->
<h5><a name="6.5.2.2" href="#6.5.2.2">6.5.2.2 Function calls</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The expression that denotes the called function<sup><a href="#note80"><b>80)</b></a></sup> shall have type pointer to function
returning void or returning an object type other than an array type.
number of arguments shall agree with the number of parameters. Each argument shall
have a type such that its value may be assigned to an object with the unqualified version
of the type of its corresponding parameter.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
A postfix expression followed by parentheses () containing a possibly empty, comma-
separated list of expressions is a function call. The postfix expression denotes the called
<p><b> Forward references</b>: function declarators (including prototypes) (<a href="#6.7.5.3">6.7.5.3</a>), function
definitions (<a href="#6.9.1">6.9.1</a>), the return statement (<a href="#6.8.6.4">6.8.6.4</a>), simple assignment (<a href="#6.5.16.1">6.5.16.1</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note80" href="#note80">80)</a> Most often, this is the result of converting an identifier that is a function designator.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note81" href="#note81">81)</a> A function may change the values of its parameters, but these changes cannot affect the values of the
</small>
<h5><a name="6.5.2.3" href="#6.5.2.3">6.5.2.3 Structure and union members</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The first operand of the . operator shall have a qualified or unqualified structure or union
type, and the second operand shall name a member of that type.
structure'' or ''pointer to qualified or unqualified union'', and the second operand shall
name a member of the type pointed to.
<!--page 85 -->
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
A postfix expression followed by the . operator and an identifier designates a member of
a structure or union object. The value is that of the named member,<sup><a href="#note82"><b>82)</b></a></sup> and is an lvalue if
specifiers (<a href="#6.7.2.1">6.7.2.1</a>).
<!--page 87 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note82" href="#note82">82)</a> If the member used to access the contents of a union object is not the same as the member last used to
store a value in the object, the appropriate part of the object representation of the value is reinterpreted
as an object representation in the new type as described in <a href="#6.2.6">6.2.6</a> (a process sometimes called "type
</small>
<h5><a name="6.5.2.4" href="#6.5.2.4">6.5.2.4 Postfix increment and decrement operators</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The operand of the postfix increment or decrement operator shall have qualified or
unqualified real or pointer type and shall be a modifiable lvalue.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The result of the postfix ++ operator is the value of the operand. After the result is
obtained, the value of the operand is incremented. (That is, the value 1 of the appropriate
<p><b> Forward references</b>: additive operators (<a href="#6.5.6">6.5.6</a>), compound assignment (<a href="#6.5.16.2">6.5.16.2</a>).
<h5><a name="6.5.2.5" href="#6.5.2.5">6.5.2.5 Compound literals</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The type name shall specify an object type or an array of unknown size, but not a variable
length array type.
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the compound literal occurs outside the body of a function, the initializer list shall
consist of constant expressions.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
A postfix expression that consists of a parenthesized type name followed by a brace-
enclosed list of initializers is a compound literal. It provides an unnamed object whose
<p><b> Forward references</b>: type names (<a href="#6.7.6">6.7.6</a>), initialization (<a href="#6.7.8">6.7.8</a>).
<!--page 90 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note84" href="#note84">84)</a> Note that this differs from a cast expression. For example, a cast specifies a conversion to scalar types
or void only, and the result of a cast expression is not an lvalue.
</small>
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.3" href="#6.5.3">6.5.3 Unary operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
unary-expression:
</pre>
<h5><a name="6.5.3.1" href="#6.5.3.1">6.5.3.1 Prefix increment and decrement operators</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The operand of the prefix increment or decrement operator shall have qualified or
unqualified real or pointer type and shall be a modifiable lvalue.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The value of the operand of the prefix ++ operator is incremented. The result is the new
value of the operand after incrementation. The expression ++E is equivalent to (E+=1).
<p><b> Forward references</b>: additive operators (<a href="#6.5.6">6.5.6</a>), compound assignment (<a href="#6.5.16.2">6.5.16.2</a>).
<h5><a name="6.5.3.2" href="#6.5.3.2">6.5.3.2 Address and indirection operators</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The operand of the unary & operator shall be either a function designator, the result of a
[] or unary * operator, or an lvalue that designates an object that is not a bit-field and is
not declared with the register storage-class specifier.
<p><!--para 2 -->
The operand of the unary * operator shall have pointer type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The unary & operator yields the address of its operand. If the operand has type ''type'',
the result has type ''pointer to type''. If the operand is the result of a unary * operator,
<p><b> Forward references</b>: storage-class specifiers (<a href="#6.7.1">6.7.1</a>), structure and union specifiers
(<a href="#6.7.2.1">6.7.2.1</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note87" href="#note87">87)</a> Thus, &*E is equivalent to E (even if E is a null pointer), and &(E1[E2]) to ((E1)+(E2)). It is
always true that if E is a function designator or an lvalue that is a valid operand of the unary &
operator, *&E is a function designator or an lvalue equal to E. If *P is an lvalue and T is the name of
</small>
<h5><a name="6.5.3.3" href="#6.5.3.3">6.5.3.3 Unary arithmetic operators</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The operand of the unary + or - operator shall have arithmetic type; of the ~ operator,
integer type; of the ! operator, scalar type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The result of the unary + operator is the value of its (promoted) operand. The integer
promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the promoted type.
<!--page 92 -->
<h5><a name="6.5.3.4" href="#6.5.3.4">6.5.3.4 The sizeof operator</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The sizeof operator shall not be applied to an expression that has function type or an
incomplete type, to the parenthesized name of such a type, or to an expression that
designates a bit-field member.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The sizeof operator yields the size (in bytes) of its operand, which may be an
expression or the parenthesized name of a type. The size is determined from the type of
<p><b> Forward references</b>: common definitions <a href="#7.17"><stddef.h></a> (<a href="#7.17">7.17</a>), declarations (<a href="#6.7">6.7</a>),
structure and union specifiers (<a href="#6.7.2.1">6.7.2.1</a>), type names (<a href="#6.7.6">6.7.6</a>), array declarators (<a href="#6.7.5.2">6.7.5.2</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note88" href="#note88">88)</a> When applied to a parameter declared to have array or function type, the sizeof operator yields the
size of the adjusted (pointer) type (see <a href="#6.9.1">6.9.1</a>).
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.4" href="#6.5.4">6.5.4 Cast operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
cast-expression:
unary-expression
( type-name ) cast-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Unless the type name specifies a void type, the type name shall specify qualified or
unqualified scalar type and the operand shall have scalar type.
<p><!--para 3 -->
Conversions that involve pointers, other than where permitted by the constraints of
<a href="#6.5.16.1">6.5.16.1</a>, shall be specified by means of an explicit cast.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
Preceding an expression by a parenthesized type name converts the value of the
expression to the named type. This construction is called a cast.<sup><a href="#note89"><b>89)</b></a></sup> A cast that specifies
<!--page 94 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note89" href="#note89">89)</a> A cast does not yield an lvalue. Thus, a cast to a qualified type has the same effect as a cast to the
unqualified version of the type.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.5" href="#6.5.5">6.5.5 Multiplicative operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
multiplicative-expression:
multiplicative-expression / cast-expression
multiplicative-expression % cast-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each of the operands shall have arithmetic type. The operands of the % operator shall
have integer type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
<p><!--para 4 -->
fractional part discarded.<sup><a href="#note90"><b>90)</b></a></sup> If the quotient a/b is representable, the expression
(a/b)*b + a%b shall equal a.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note90" href="#note90">90)</a> This is often called ''truncation toward zero''.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.6" href="#6.5.6">6.5.6 Additive operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
additive-expression:
additive-expression + multiplicative-expression
additive-expression - multiplicative-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
For addition, either both operands shall have arithmetic type, or one operand shall be a
pointer to an object type and the other shall have integer type. (Incrementing is
<li> the left operand is a pointer to an object type and the right operand has integer type.
</ul>
(Decrementing is equivalent to subtracting 1.)
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If both operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are performed on
them.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: array declarators (<a href="#6.7.5.2">6.7.5.2</a>), common definitions <a href="#7.17"><stddef.h></a>
(<a href="#7.17">7.17</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note91" href="#note91">91)</a> Another way to approach pointer arithmetic is first to convert the pointer(s) to character pointer(s): In
this scheme the integer expression added to or subtracted from the converted pointer is first multiplied
by the size of the object originally pointed to, and the resulting pointer is converted back to the
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.7" href="#6.5.7">6.5.7 Bitwise shift operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
shift-expression:
shift-expression << additive-expression
shift-expression >> additive-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each of the operands shall have integer type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The integer promotions are performed on each of the operands. The type of the result is
that of the promoted left operand. If the value of the right operand is negative or is
resulting value is implementation-defined.
<h4><a name="6.5.8" href="#6.5.8">6.5.8 Relational operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
relational-expression:
relational-expression <= shift-expression
relational-expression >= shift-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
One of the following shall hold:
<ul>
<li> both operands are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible
incomplete types.
</ul>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If both of the operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are
performed.
(greater than or equal to) shall yield 1 if the specified relation is true and 0 if it is false.<sup><a href="#note92"><b>92)</b></a></sup>
The result has type int.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note92" href="#note92">92)</a> The expression a<b<c is not interpreted as in ordinary mathematics. As the syntax indicates, it
means (a<b)<c; in other words, ''if a is less than b, compare 1 to c; otherwise, compare 0 to c''.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.9" href="#6.5.9">6.5.9 Equality operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
equality-expression:
equality-expression == relational-expression
equality-expression != relational-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
One of the following shall hold:
<ul>
qualified or unqualified version of void; or
<li> one operand is a pointer and the other is a null pointer constant.
</ul>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The == (equal to) and != (not equal to) operators are analogous to the relational
operators except for their lower precedence.<sup><a href="#note93"><b>93)</b></a></sup> Each of the operators yields 1 if the
array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the
type of the object as its element type.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note93" href="#note93">93)</a> Because of the precedences, a<b == c<d is 1 whenever a<b and c<d have the same truth-value.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note94" href="#note94">94)</a> Two objects may be adjacent in memory because they are adjacent elements of a larger array or
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.10" href="#6.5.10">6.5.10 Bitwise AND operator</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
AND-expression:
equality-expression
AND-expression & equality-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each of the operands shall have integer type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
<p><!--para 4 -->
<!--page 100 -->
<h4><a name="6.5.11" href="#6.5.11">6.5.11 Bitwise exclusive OR operator</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
exclusive-OR-expression:
AND-expression
exclusive-OR-expression ^ AND-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each of the operands shall have integer type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
<p><!--para 4 -->
operands is set).
<h4><a name="6.5.12" href="#6.5.12">6.5.12 Bitwise inclusive OR operator</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
inclusive-OR-expression:
exclusive-OR-expression
inclusive-OR-expression | exclusive-OR-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each of the operands shall have integer type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.
<p><!--para 4 -->
<!--page 101 -->
<h4><a name="6.5.13" href="#6.5.13">6.5.13 Logical AND operator</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
logical-AND-expression:
inclusive-OR-expression
logical-AND-expression && inclusive-OR-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each of the operands shall have scalar type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The && operator shall yield 1 if both of its operands compare unequal to 0; otherwise, it
yields 0. The result has type int.
compares equal to 0, the second operand is not evaluated.
<h4><a name="6.5.14" href="#6.5.14">6.5.14 Logical OR operator</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
logical-OR-expression:
logical-AND-expression
logical-OR-expression || logical-AND-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each of the operands shall have scalar type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The || operator shall yield 1 if either of its operands compare unequal to 0; otherwise, it
yields 0. The result has type int.
<!--page 102 -->
<h4><a name="6.5.15" href="#6.5.15">6.5.15 Conditional operator</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
conditional-expression:
logical-OR-expression
logical-OR-expression ? expression : conditional-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The first operand shall have scalar type.
<p><!--para 3 -->
<li> one operand is a pointer to an object or incomplete type and the other is a pointer to a
qualified or unqualified version of void.
</ul>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The first operand is evaluated; there is a sequence point after its evaluation. The second
operand is evaluated only if the first compares unequal to 0; the third operand is evaluated
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note95" href="#note95">95)</a> A conditional expression does not yield an lvalue.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.5.16" href="#6.5.16">6.5.16 Assignment operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
assignment-expression:
assignment-operator: one of
= *= /= %= += -= <<= >>= &= ^= |=
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
An assignment operator shall have a modifiable lvalue as its left operand.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
An assignment operator stores a value in the object designated by the left operand. An
assignment expression has the value of the left operand after the assignment, but is not an
<!--page 104 -->
<h5><a name="6.5.16.1" href="#6.5.16.1">6.5.16.1 Simple assignment</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
One of the following shall hold:<sup><a href="#note96"><b>96)</b></a></sup>
<ul>
<li> the left operand is a pointer and the right is a null pointer constant; or
<li> the left operand has type _Bool and the right is a pointer.
</ul>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
In simple assignment (=), the value of the right operand is converted to the type of the
assignment expression and replaces the value stored in the object designated by the left
value of the const object c.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note96" href="#note96">96)</a> The asymmetric appearance of these constraints with respect to type qualifiers is due to the conversion
(specified in <a href="#6.3.2.1">6.3.2.1</a>) that changes lvalues to ''the value of the expression'' and thus removes any type
qualifiers that were applied to the type category of the expression (for example, it removes const but
</small>
<h5><a name="6.5.16.2" href="#6.5.16.2">6.5.16.2 Compound assignment</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
For the operators += and -= only, either the left operand shall be a pointer to an object
type and the right shall have integer type, or the left operand shall have qualified or
<p><!--para 2 -->
For the other operators, each operand shall have arithmetic type consistent with those
allowed by the corresponding binary operator.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
A compound assignment of the form E1 op = E2 differs from the simple assignment
expression E1 = E1 op (E2) only in that the lvalue E1 is evaluated only once.
<!--page 106 -->
<h4><a name="6.5.17" href="#6.5.17">6.5.17 Comma operator</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
expression:
assignment-expression
expression , assignment-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The left operand of a comma operator is evaluated as a void expression; there is a
sequence point after its evaluation. Then the right operand is evaluated; the result has its
<!--page 107 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note97" href="#note97">97)</a> A comma operator does not yield an lvalue.
</small>
<h3><a name="6.6" href="#6.6">6.6 Constant expressions</a></h3>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
constant-expression:
conditional-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A constant expression can be evaluated during translation rather than runtime, and
accordingly may be used in any place that a constant may be.
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
Constant expressions shall not contain assignment, increment, decrement, function-call,
or comma operators, except when they are contained within a subexpression that is not
<p><!--para 4 -->
Each constant expression shall evaluate to a constant that is in the range of representable
values for its type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
An expression that evaluates to a constant is required in several contexts. If a floating
expression is evaluated in the translation environment, the arithmetic precision and range
<!--page 109 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note98" href="#note98">98)</a> The operand of a sizeof operator is usually not evaluated (<a href="#6.5.3.4">6.5.3.4</a>).
</small>
<p><small><a name="note99" href="#note99">99)</a> An integer constant expression is used to specify the size of a bit-field member of a structure, the
</small>
<h3><a name="6.7" href="#6.7">6.7 Declarations</a></h3>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
declaration:
declarator
declarator = initializer
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A declaration shall declare at least a declarator (other than the parameters of a function or
the members of a structure or union), a tag, or the members of an enumeration.
<p><!--para 4 -->
All declarations in the same scope that refer to the same object or function shall specify
compatible types.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
A declaration specifies the interpretation and attributes of a set of identifiers. A definition
of an identifier is a declaration for that identifier that:
<p><b> Forward references</b>: declarators (<a href="#6.7.5">6.7.5</a>), enumeration specifiers (<a href="#6.7.2.2">6.7.2.2</a>), initialization
(<a href="#6.7.8">6.7.8</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note101" href="#note101">101)</a> Function definitions have a different syntax, described in <a href="#6.9.1">6.9.1</a>.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.7.1" href="#6.7.1">6.7.1 Storage-class specifiers</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
storage-class-specifier:
auto
register
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
At most, one storage-class specifier may be given in the declaration specifiers in a
declaration.<sup><a href="#note102"><b>102)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The typedef specifier is called a ''storage-class specifier'' for syntactic convenience
only; it is discussed in <a href="#6.7.7">6.7.7</a>. The meanings of the various linkages and storage durations
or union member objects.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: type definitions (<a href="#6.7.7">6.7.7</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note102" href="#note102">102)</a> See ''future language directions'' (<a href="#6.11.5">6.11.5</a>).
</small>
<p><small><a name="note103" href="#note103">103)</a> The implementation may treat any register declaration simply as an auto declaration. However,
</small>
<h4><a name="6.7.2" href="#6.7.2">6.7.2 Type specifiers</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
type-specifier:
enum-specifier
typedef-name
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
At least one type specifier shall be given in the declaration specifiers in each declaration,
and in the specifier-qualifier list in each struct declaration and type name. Each list of
<p><!--para 3 -->
The type specifier _Complex shall not be used if the implementation does not provide
complex types.<sup><a href="#note104"><b>104)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
Specifiers for structures, unions, and enumerations are discussed in <a href="#6.7.2.1">6.7.2.1</a> through
<a href="#6.7.2.3">6.7.2.3</a>. Declarations of typedef names are discussed in <a href="#6.7.7">6.7.7</a>. The characteristics of the
<!--page 113 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note104" href="#note104">104)</a> Freestanding implementations are not required to provide complex types. *
</small>
<h5><a name="6.7.2.1" href="#6.7.2.1">6.7.2.1 Structure and union specifiers</a></h5>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
struct-or-union-specifier:
declarator
declarator<sub>opt</sub> : constant-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A structure or union shall not contain a member with incomplete or function type (hence,
a structure shall not contain an instance of itself, but may contain a pointer to an instance
A bit-field shall have a type that is a qualified or unqualified version of _Bool, signed
int, unsigned int, or some other implementation-defined type.
<!--page 114 -->
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
As discussed in <a href="#6.2.5">6.2.5</a>, a structure is a type consisting of a sequence of members, whose
storage is allocated in an ordered sequence, and a union is a type consisting of a sequence
<p><b> Forward references</b>: tags (<a href="#6.7.2.3">6.7.2.3</a>).
<!--page 117 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note105" href="#note105">105)</a> A structure or union can not contain a member with a variably modified type because member names
are not ordinary identifiers as defined in <a href="#6.2.3">6.2.3</a>.
</small>
</small>
<h5><a name="6.7.2.2" href="#6.7.2.2">6.7.2.2 Enumeration specifiers</a></h5>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
enum-specifier:
enumeration-constant
enumeration-constant = constant-expression
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The expression that defines the value of an enumeration constant shall be an integer
constant expression that has a value representable as an int.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The identifiers in an enumerator list are declared as constants that have type int and
may appear wherever such are permitted.<sup><a href="#note109"><b>109)</b></a></sup> An enumerator with = defines its
<p><b> Forward references</b>: tags (<a href="#6.7.2.3">6.7.2.3</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note109" href="#note109">109)</a> Thus, the identifiers of enumeration constants declared in the same scope shall all be distinct from
each other and from other identifiers declared in ordinary declarators.
</small>
</small>
<h5><a name="6.7.2.3" href="#6.7.2.3">6.7.2.3 Tags</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A specific type shall have its content defined at most once.
<p><!--para 2 -->
enum identifier
</pre>
without an enumerator list shall only appear after the type it specifies is complete.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
All declarations of structure, union, or enumerated types that have the same scope and
use the same tag declare the same type. The type is incomplete<sup><a href="#note111"><b>111)</b></a></sup> until the closing brace
<p><b> Forward references</b>: declarators (<a href="#6.7.5">6.7.5</a>), array declarators (<a href="#6.7.5.2">6.7.5.2</a>), type definitions
(<a href="#6.7.7">6.7.7</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note111" href="#note111">111)</a> An incomplete type may only by used when the size of an object of that type is not needed. It is not
needed, for example, when a typedef name is declared to be a specifier for a structure or union, or
when a pointer to or a function returning a structure or union is being declared. (See incomplete types
</small>
<h4><a name="6.7.3" href="#6.7.3">6.7.3 Type qualifiers</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
type-qualifier:
restrict
volatile
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Types other than pointer types derived from object or incomplete types shall not be
restrict-qualified.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The properties associated with qualified types are meaningful only for expressions that
are lvalues.<sup><a href="#note114"><b>114)</b></a></sup>
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note114" href="#note114">114)</a> The implementation may place a const object that is not volatile in a read-only region of
storage. Moreover, the implementation need not allocate storage for such an object if its address is
never used.
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note119" href="#note119">119)</a> In other words, E depends on the value of P itself rather than on the value of an object referenced
indirectly through P. For example, if identifier p has type (int **restrict), then the pointer
expressions p and p+1 are based on the restricted pointer object designated by p, but the pointer
</small>
<h4><a name="6.7.4" href="#6.7.4">6.7.4 Function specifiers</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
function-specifier:
inline
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Function specifiers shall be used only in the declaration of an identifier for a function.
<p><!--para 3 -->
<p><!--para 4 -->
In a hosted environment, the inline function specifier shall not appear in a declaration
of main.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
A function declared with an inline function specifier is an inline function. The
function specifier may appear more than once; the behavior is the same as if it appeared
<!--page 126 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note120" href="#note120">120)</a> By using, for example, an alternative to the usual function call mechanism, such as ''inline
substitution''. Inline substitution is not textual substitution, nor does it create a new function.
Therefore, for example, the expansion of a macro used within the body of the function uses the
</small>
<h4><a name="6.7.5" href="#6.7.5">6.7.5 Declarators</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
declarator:
identifier
identifier-list , identifier
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Each declarator declares one identifier, and asserts that when an operand of the same
form as the declarator appears in an expression, it designates a function or object with the
then ident has the type specified by the declaration ''T D''. Thus, a declarator in
parentheses is identical to the unparenthesized declarator, but the binding of complicated
declarators may be altered by parentheses.
-<h6>Implementation limits</h6>
+<p><b>Implementation limits</b>
<p><!--para 7 -->
As discussed in <a href="#5.2.4.1">5.2.4.1</a>, an implementation may limit the number of pointer, array, and
function declarators that modify an arithmetic, structure, union, or incomplete type, either
<p><b> Forward references</b>: array declarators (<a href="#6.7.5.2">6.7.5.2</a>), type definitions (<a href="#6.7.7">6.7.7</a>).
<h5><a name="6.7.5.1" href="#6.7.5.1">6.7.5.1 Pointer declarators</a></h5>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
<pre>
<h5><a name="6.7.5.2" href="#6.7.5.2">6.7.5.2 Array declarators</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
In addition to optional type qualifiers and the keyword static, the [ and ] may delimit
an expression or *. If they delimit an expression (which specifies the size of an array), the
An ordinary identifier (as defined in <a href="#6.2.3">6.2.3</a>) that has a variably modified type shall have
either block scope and no linkage or function prototype scope. If an identifier is declared
to be an object with static storage duration, it shall not have a variable length array type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has one of the forms:
<pre>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: function declarators (<a href="#6.7.5.3">6.7.5.3</a>), function definitions (<a href="#6.9.1">6.9.1</a>),
initialization (<a href="#6.7.8">6.7.8</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note123" href="#note123">123)</a> When several ''array of'' specifications are adjacent, a multidimensional array is declared.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note124" href="#note124">124)</a> Thus, * can be used only in function declarations that are not definitions (see <a href="#6.7.5.3">6.7.5.3</a>).
</small>
<h5><a name="6.7.5.3" href="#6.7.5.3">6.7.5.3 Function declarators (including prototypes)</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A function declarator shall not specify a return type that is a function type or an array
type.
<p><!--para 4 -->
After adjustment, the parameters in a parameter type list in a function declarator that is
part of a definition of that function shall not have incomplete type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
If, in the declaration ''T D1'', D1 has the form
<pre>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: function definitions (<a href="#6.9.1">6.9.1</a>), type names (<a href="#6.7.6">6.7.6</a>).
<!--page 134 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note125" href="#note125">125)</a> The macros defined in the <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a> header (<a href="#7.15">7.15</a>) may be used to access arguments that
correspond to the ellipsis.
</small>
</small>
<h4><a name="6.7.6" href="#6.7.6">6.7.6 Type names</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
type-name:
direct-abstract-declarator<sub>opt</sub> [ * ]
direct-abstract-declarator<sub>opt</sub> ( parameter-type-list<sub>opt</sub> )
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
In several contexts, it is necessary to specify a type. This is accomplished using a type
name, which is syntactically a declaration for a function or an object of that type that
<!--page 135 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note128" href="#note128">128)</a> As indicated by the syntax, empty parentheses in a type name are interpreted as ''function with no
parameter specification'', rather than redundant parentheses around the omitted identifier.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.7.7" href="#6.7.7">6.7.7 Type definitions</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
typedef-name:
identifier
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If a typedef name specifies a variably modified type then it shall have block scope.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
In a declaration whose storage-class specifier is typedef, each declarator defines an
identifier to be a typedef name that denotes the type specified for the identifier in the way
</pre>
<h4><a name="6.7.8" href="#6.7.8">6.7.8 Initialization</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
initializer:
[ constant-expression ]
. identifier
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
No initializer shall attempt to provide a value for an object not contained within the entity
being initialized.
then the current object (defined below) shall have structure or union type and the
identifier shall be the name of a member of that type.
<!--page 138 -->
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
An initializer specifies the initial value stored in an object.
<p><!--para 9 -->
<p><b> Forward references</b>: common definitions <a href="#7.17"><stddef.h></a> (<a href="#7.17">7.17</a>).
<!--page 143 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note129" href="#note129">129)</a> If the initializer list for a subaggregate or contained union does not begin with a left brace, its
subobjects are initialized as usual, but the subaggregate or contained union does not become the
current object: current objects are associated only with brace-enclosed initializer lists.
</small>
<h3><a name="6.8" href="#6.8">6.8 Statements and blocks</a></h3>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
statement:
iteration-statement
jump-statement
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A statement specifies an action to be performed. Except as indicated, statements are
executed in sequence.
(<a href="#6.8.4">6.8.4</a>), iteration statements (<a href="#6.8.5">6.8.5</a>), the return statement (<a href="#6.8.6.4">6.8.6.4</a>).
<h4><a name="6.8.1" href="#6.8.1">6.8.1 Labeled statements</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
labeled-statement:
case constant-expression : statement
default : statement
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A case or default label shall appear only in a switch statement. Further
constraints on such labels are discussed under the switch statement.
<!--page 144 -->
<p><!--para 3 -->
Label names shall be unique within a function.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
Any statement may be preceded by a prefix that declares an identifier as a label name.
Labels in themselves do not alter the flow of control, which continues unimpeded across
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the goto statement (<a href="#6.8.6.1">6.8.6.1</a>), the switch statement (<a href="#6.8.4.2">6.8.4.2</a>).
<h4><a name="6.8.2" href="#6.8.2">6.8.2 Compound statement</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
compound-statement:
declaration
statement
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A compound statement is a block.
<h4><a name="6.8.3" href="#6.8.3">6.8.3 Expression and null statements</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
expression-statement:
expression<sub>opt</sub> ;
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The expression in an expression statement is evaluated as a void expression for its side
effects.<sup><a href="#note134"><b>134)</b></a></sup>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: iteration statements (<a href="#6.8.5">6.8.5</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note134" href="#note134">134)</a> Such as assignments, and function calls which have side effects.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.8.4" href="#6.8.4">6.8.4 Selection statements</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
selection-statement:
if ( expression ) statement else statement
switch ( expression ) statement
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A selection statement selects among a set of statements depending on the value of a
controlling expression.
subset of the scope of the selection statement.
<h5><a name="6.8.4.1" href="#6.8.4.1">6.8.4.1 The if statement</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The controlling expression of an if statement shall have scalar type.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
In both forms, the first substatement is executed if the expression compares unequal to 0.
In the else form, the second substatement is executed if the expression compares equal
syntax.
<h5><a name="6.8.4.2" href="#6.8.4.2">6.8.4.2 The switch statement</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The controlling expression of a switch statement shall have integer type.
<p><!--para 2 -->
(Any enclosed switch statement may have a default label or case constant
expressions with values that duplicate case constant expressions in the enclosing
switch statement.)
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
A switch statement causes control to jump to, into, or past the statement that is the
switch body, depending on the value of a controlling expression, and on the presence of a
a default label, control jumps to the labeled statement. If no converted case constant
expression matches and there is no default label, no part of the switch body is
executed.
-<h6>Implementation limits</h6>
+<p><b>Implementation limits</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
As discussed in <a href="#5.2.4.1">5.2.4.1</a>, the implementation may limit the number of case values in a
switch statement.
access an indeterminate value. Similarly, the call to the function f cannot be reached.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note135" href="#note135">135)</a> That is, the declaration either precedes the switch statement, or it follows the last case or
default label associated with the switch that is in the block containing the declaration.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.8.5" href="#6.8.5">6.8.5 Iteration statements</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
iteration-statement:
for ( expression<sub>opt</sub> ; expression<sub>opt</sub> ; expression<sub>opt</sub> ) statement
for ( declaration expression<sub>opt</sub> ; expression<sub>opt</sub> ) statement
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The controlling expression of an iteration statement shall have scalar type.
<p><!--para 3 -->
The declaration part of a for statement shall only declare identifiers for objects having
storage class auto or register.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
An iteration statement causes a statement called the loop body to be executed repeatedly
until the controlling expression compares equal to 0. The repetition occurs regardless of
<!--page 148 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note136" href="#note136">136)</a> Code jumped over is not executed. In particular, the controlling expression of a for or while
statement is not evaluated before entering the loop body, nor is clause-1 of a for statement.
</small>
Both clause-1 and expression-3 can be omitted. An omitted expression-2 is replaced by a
nonzero constant.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note137" href="#note137">137)</a> Thus, clause-1 specifies initialization for the loop, possibly declaring one or more variables for use in
the loop; the controlling expression, expression-2, specifies an evaluation made before each iteration,
such that execution of the loop continues until the expression compares equal to 0; and expression-3
</small>
<h4><a name="6.8.6" href="#6.8.6">6.8.6 Jump statements</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
jump-statement:
break ;
return expression<sub>opt</sub> ;
</pre>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A jump statement causes an unconditional jump to another place.
<!--page 149 -->
<h5><a name="6.8.6.1" href="#6.8.6.1">6.8.6.1 The goto statement</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The identifier in a goto statement shall name a label located somewhere in the enclosing
function. A goto statement shall not jump from outside the scope of an identifier having
a variably modified type to inside the scope of that identifier.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A goto statement causes an unconditional jump to the statement prefixed by the named
label in the enclosing function.
<h5><a name="6.8.6.2" href="#6.8.6.2">6.8.6.2 The continue statement</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A continue statement shall appear only in or as a loop body.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A continue statement causes a jump to the loop-continuation portion of the smallest
enclosing iteration statement; that is, to the end of the loop body. More precisely, in each
unless the continue statement shown is in an enclosed iteration statement (in which
case it is interpreted within that statement), it is equivalent to goto contin;.<sup><a href="#note138"><b>138)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note138" href="#note138">138)</a> Following the contin: label is a null statement.
</small>
<h5><a name="6.8.6.3" href="#6.8.6.3">6.8.6.3 The break statement</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A break statement shall appear only in or as a switch body or loop body.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A break statement terminates execution of the smallest enclosing switch or iteration
statement.
<!--page 151 -->
<h5><a name="6.8.6.4" href="#6.8.6.4">6.8.6.4 The return statement</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A return statement with an expression shall not appear in a function whose return type
is void. A return statement without an expression shall only appear in a function
whose return type is void.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A return statement terminates execution of the current function and returns control to
its caller. A function may have any number of return statements.
<!--page 152 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note139" href="#note139">139)</a> The return statement is not an assignment. The overlap restriction of subclause <a href="#6.5.16.1">6.5.16.1</a> does not
apply to the case of function return. The representation of floating-point values may have wider range
or precision and is determined by FLT_EVAL_METHOD. A cast may be used to remove this extra
</small>
<h3><a name="6.9" href="#6.9">6.9 External definitions</a></h3>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
translation-unit:
function-definition
declaration
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The storage-class specifiers auto and register shall not appear in the declaration
specifiers in an external declaration.
linkage is used in an expression (other than as a part of the operand of a sizeof
operator whose result is an integer constant), there shall be exactly one external definition
for the identifier in the translation unit.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
As discussed in <a href="#5.1.1.1">5.1.1.1</a>, the unit of program text after preprocessing is a translation unit,
which consists of a sequence of external declarations. These are described as ''external''
<!--page 153 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note140" href="#note140">140)</a> Thus, if an identifier declared with external linkage is not used in an expression, there need be no
external definition for it.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.9.1" href="#6.9.1">6.9.1 Function definitions</a></h4>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
function-definition:
declaration
declaration-list declaration
</pre>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The identifier declared in a function definition (which is the name of the function) shall
have a function type, as specified by the declarator portion of the function definition.<sup><a href="#note141"><b>141)</b></a></sup>
<!--page 154 -->
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 7 -->
The declarator in a function definition specifies the name of the function being defined
and the identifiers of its parameters. If the declarator includes a parameter type list, the
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note141" href="#note141">141)</a> The intent is that the type category in a function definition cannot be inherited from a typedef:
<pre>
</small>
<h4><a name="6.9.2" href="#6.9.2">6.9.2 External object definitions</a></h4>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
If the declaration of an identifier for an object has file scope and an initializer, the
declaration is an external definition for the identifier.
<!--page 157 -->
<h3><a name="6.10" href="#6.10">6.10 Preprocessing directives</a></h3>
-<h6>Syntax</h6>
+<p><b>Syntax</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 158 -->
<pre>
new-line:
the new-line character
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A preprocessing directive consists of a sequence of preprocessing tokens that satisfies the
following constraints: The first token in the sequence is a # preprocessing token that (at
When in a group that is skipped (<a href="#6.10.1">6.10.1</a>), the directive syntax is relaxed to allow any
sequence of preprocessing tokens to occur between the directive name and the following
new-line character.
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
The only white-space characters that shall appear between preprocessing tokens within a
preprocessing directive (from just after the introducing # preprocessing token through
just before the terminating new-line character) are space and horizontal-tab (including
spaces that have replaced comments or possibly other white-space characters in
translation phase 3).
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
The implementation can process and skip sections of source files conditionally, include
other source files, and replace macros. These capabilities are called preprocessing,
replaced.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note143" href="#note143">143)</a> Thus, preprocessing directives are commonly called ''lines''. These ''lines'' have no other syntactic
significance, as all white space is equivalent except in certain situations during preprocessing (see the
# character string literal creation operator in <a href="#6.10.3.2">6.10.3.2</a>, for example).
</small>
<h4><a name="6.10.1" href="#6.10.1">6.10.1 Conditional inclusion</a></h4>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The expression that controls conditional inclusion shall be an integer constant expression
except that: it shall not contain a cast; identifiers (including those lexically identical to
Each preprocessing token that remains (in the list of preprocessing tokens that will
become the controlling expression) after all macro replacements have occurred shall be in
the lexical form of a token (<a href="#6.4">6.4</a>).
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
Preprocessing directives of the forms
<pre>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: macro replacement (<a href="#6.10.3">6.10.3</a>), source file inclusion (<a href="#6.10.2">6.10.2</a>), largest
integer types (<a href="#7.18.1.5">7.18.1.5</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note144" href="#note144">144)</a> Because the controlling constant expression is evaluated during translation phase 4, all identifiers
either are or are not macro names -- there simply are no keywords, enumeration constants, etc.
</small>
</small>
<h4><a name="6.10.2" href="#6.10.2">6.10.2 Source file inclusion</a></h4>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A #include directive shall identify a header or source file that can be processed by the
implementation.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A preprocessing directive of the form
<pre>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: macro replacement (<a href="#6.10.3">6.10.3</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note148" href="#note148">148)</a> Note that adjacent string literals are not concatenated into a single string literal (see the translation
phases in <a href="#5.1.1.2">5.1.1.2</a>); thus, an expansion that results in two string literals is an invalid directive.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.10.3" href="#6.10.3">6.10.3 Macro replacement</a></h4>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
Two replacement lists are identical if and only if the preprocessing tokens in both have
the same number, ordering, spelling, and white-space separation, where all white-space
<p><!--para 6 -->
A parameter identifier in a function-like macro shall be uniquely declared within its
scope.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 7 -->
The identifier immediately following the define is called the macro name. There is one
name space for macro names. Any white-space characters preceding or following the
merger, the number of arguments is one more than the number of parameters in the macro
definition (excluding the ...).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note149" href="#note149">149)</a> Since, by macro-replacement time, all character constants and string literals are preprocessing tokens,
not sequences possibly containing identifier-like subsequences (see <a href="#5.1.1.2">5.1.1.2</a>, translation phases), they
are never scanned for macro names or parameters.
replace it.
<h5><a name="6.10.3.2" href="#6.10.3.2">6.10.3.2 The # operator</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
Each # preprocessing token in the replacement list for a function-like macro shall be
followed by a parameter as the next preprocessing token in the replacement list.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If, in the replacement list, a parameter is immediately preceded by a # preprocessing
token, both are replaced by a single character string literal preprocessing token that
<!--page 166 -->
<h5><a name="6.10.3.3" href="#6.10.3.3">6.10.3.3 The ## operator</a></h5>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A ## preprocessing token shall not occur at the beginning or at the end of a replacement
list for either form of macro definition.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If, in the replacement list of a function-like macro, a parameter is immediately preceded
or followed by a ## preprocessing token, the parameter is replaced by the corresponding
<!--page 167 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note151" href="#note151">151)</a> Placemarker preprocessing tokens do not appear in the syntax because they are temporary entities that
exist only within translation phase 4.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.10.4" href="#6.10.4">6.10.4 Line control</a></h4>
-<h6>Constraints</h6>
+<p><b>Constraints</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
The string literal of a #line directive, if present, shall be a character string literal.
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The line number of the current source line is one greater than the number of new-line
characters read or introduced in translation phase 1 (<a href="#5.1.1.2">5.1.1.2</a>) while processing the source
<!--page 171 -->
<h4><a name="6.10.5" href="#6.10.5">6.10.5 Error directive</a></h4>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A preprocessing directive of the form
<pre>
sequence of preprocessing tokens.
<h4><a name="6.10.6" href="#6.10.6">6.10.6 Pragma directive</a></h4>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A preprocessing directive of the form
<pre>
<!--page 172 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note152" href="#note152">152)</a> An implementation is not required to perform macro replacement in pragmas, but it is permitted
except for in standard pragmas (where STDC immediately follows pragma). If the result of macro
replacement in a non-standard pragma has the same form as a standard pragma, the behavior is still
</small>
<h4><a name="6.10.7" href="#6.10.7">6.10.7 Null directive</a></h4>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A preprocessing directive of the form
<pre>
in any standard header.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the asctime function (<a href="#7.23.3.1">7.23.3.1</a>), standard headers (<a href="#7.1.2">7.1.2</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note154" href="#note154">154)</a> See ''future language directions'' (<a href="#6.11.9">6.11.9</a>).
</small>
<p><small><a name="note155" href="#note155">155)</a> The presumed source file name and line number can be changed by the #line directive.
</small>
<h4><a name="6.10.9" href="#6.10.9">6.10.9 Pragma operator</a></h4>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
A unary operator expression of the form:
<pre>
<!--page 177 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note157" href="#note157">157)</a> The functions that make use of the decimal-point character are the numeric conversion functions
(<a href="#7.20.1">7.20.1</a>, <a href="#7.24.4.1">7.24.4.1</a>) and the formatted input/output functions (<a href="#7.19.6">7.19.6</a>, <a href="#7.24.2">7.24.2</a>).
</small>
<!--page 178 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note159" href="#note159">159)</a> A header is not necessarily a source file, nor are the < and > delimited sequences in header names
necessarily valid source file names.
</small>
If the program removes (with #undef) any macro definition of an identifier in the first
group listed above, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note160" href="#note160">160)</a> The list of reserved identifiers with external linkage includes errno, math_errhandling,
setjmp, and va_end.
</small>
</pre>
</ul>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note161" href="#note161">161)</a> This means that an implementation shall provide an actual function for each library function, even if it
also provides a macro for that function.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.2.1" href="#7.2.1">7.2.1 Program diagnostics</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.2.1.1" href="#7.2.1.1">7.2.1.1 The assert macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.2"><assert.h></a>
void assert(scalar expression);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The assert macro puts diagnostic tests into programs; it expands to a void expression.
When it is executed, if expression (which shall have a scalar type) is false (that is,
the preprocessing macros __FILE__ and __LINE__ and of the identifier
__func__) on the standard error stream in an implementation-defined format.<sup><a href="#note165"><b>165)</b></a></sup> It
then calls the abort function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The assert macro returns no value.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the abort function (<a href="#7.20.4.1">7.20.4.1</a>).
<!--page 182 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note165" href="#note165">165)</a> The message written might be of the form:
Assertion failed: expression, function abc, file xyz, line nnn.
</small>
<!--page 183 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note166" href="#note166">166)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.1">7.26.1</a>).
</small>
<p><small><a name="note167" href="#note167">167)</a> The imaginary unit is a number i such that i<sup>2</sup> = -1.
so the cut maps to the positive imaginary axis.
<h4><a name="7.3.4" href="#7.3.4">7.3.4 The CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma</a></h4>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
#pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE on-off-switch
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The usual mathematical formulas for complex multiply, divide, and absolute value are
problematic because of their treatment of infinities and because of undue overflow and
compound statement. If this pragma is used in any other context, the behavior is
undefined. The default state for the pragma is ''off''.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note169" href="#note169">169)</a> The purpose of the pragma is to allow the implementation to use the formulas:
<pre>
<h4><a name="7.3.5" href="#7.3.5">7.3.5 Trigonometric functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.3.5.1" href="#7.3.5.1">7.3.5.1 The cacos functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex cacosf(float complex z);
long double complex cacosl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cacos functions compute the complex arc cosine of z, with branch cuts outside the
interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cacos functions return the complex arc cosine value, in the range of a strip
mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [0, pi ] along the
real axis.
<h5><a name="7.3.5.2" href="#7.3.5.2">7.3.5.2 The casin functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex casinf(float complex z);
long double complex casinl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The casin functions compute the complex arc sine of z, with branch cuts outside the
interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The casin functions return the complex arc sine value, in the range of a strip
mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2]
<!--page 185 -->
<h5><a name="7.3.5.3" href="#7.3.5.3">7.3.5.3 The catan functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex catanf(float complex z);
long double complex catanl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The catan functions compute the complex arc tangent of z, with branch cuts outside the
interval [-i, +i] along the imaginary axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The catan functions return the complex arc tangent value, in the range of a strip
mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2]
along the real axis.
<h5><a name="7.3.5.4" href="#7.3.5.4">7.3.5.4 The ccos functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex ccosf(float complex z);
long double complex ccosl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ccos functions compute the complex cosine of z.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ccos functions return the complex cosine value.
<h5><a name="7.3.5.5" href="#7.3.5.5">7.3.5.5 The csin functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex csinf(float complex z);
long double complex csinl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The csin functions compute the complex sine of z.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The csin functions return the complex sine value.
<!--page 186 -->
<h5><a name="7.3.5.6" href="#7.3.5.6">7.3.5.6 The ctan functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex ctanf(float complex z);
long double complex ctanl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ctan functions compute the complex tangent of z.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ctan functions return the complex tangent value.
<h4><a name="7.3.6" href="#7.3.6">7.3.6 Hyperbolic functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.3.6.1" href="#7.3.6.1">7.3.6.1 The cacosh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex cacoshf(float complex z);
long double complex cacoshl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cacosh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic cosine of z, with a branch
cut at values less than 1 along the real axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cacosh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic cosine value, in the range of a
half-strip of non-negative values along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi , +ipi ] along
the imaginary axis.
<h5><a name="7.3.6.2" href="#7.3.6.2">7.3.6.2 The casinh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex casinhf(float complex z);
long double complex casinhl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The casinh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic sine of z, with branch cuts
outside the interval [-i, +i] along the imaginary axis.
<!--page 187 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The casinh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic sine value, in the range of a
strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi /2, +ipi /2]
along the imaginary axis.
<h5><a name="7.3.6.3" href="#7.3.6.3">7.3.6.3 The catanh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex catanhf(float complex z);
long double complex catanhl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The catanh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic tangent of z, with branch
cuts outside the interval [-1, +1] along the real axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The catanh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic tangent value, in the range of a
strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi /2, +ipi /2]
along the imaginary axis.
<h5><a name="7.3.6.4" href="#7.3.6.4">7.3.6.4 The ccosh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex ccoshf(float complex z);
long double complex ccoshl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ccosh functions compute the complex hyperbolic cosine of z.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ccosh functions return the complex hyperbolic cosine value.
<h5><a name="7.3.6.5" href="#7.3.6.5">7.3.6.5 The csinh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 188 -->
<pre>
float complex csinhf(float complex z);
long double complex csinhl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The csinh functions compute the complex hyperbolic sine of z.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The csinh functions return the complex hyperbolic sine value.
<h5><a name="7.3.6.6" href="#7.3.6.6">7.3.6.6 The ctanh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex ctanhf(float complex z);
long double complex ctanhl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ctanh functions compute the complex hyperbolic tangent of z.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ctanh functions return the complex hyperbolic tangent value.
<h4><a name="7.3.7" href="#7.3.7">7.3.7 Exponential and logarithmic functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.3.7.1" href="#7.3.7.1">7.3.7.1 The cexp functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex cexpf(float complex z);
long double complex cexpl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cexp functions compute the complex base-e exponential of z.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cexp functions return the complex base-e exponential value.
<h5><a name="7.3.7.2" href="#7.3.7.2">7.3.7.2 The clog functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 189 -->
<pre>
float complex clogf(float complex z);
long double complex clogl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The clog functions compute the complex natural (base-e) logarithm of z, with a branch
cut along the negative real axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The clog functions return the complex natural logarithm value, in the range of a strip
mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [-ipi , +ipi ] along the
<h4><a name="7.3.8" href="#7.3.8">7.3.8 Power and absolute-value functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.3.8.1" href="#7.3.8.1">7.3.8.1 The cabs functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float cabsf(float complex z);
long double cabsl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cabs functions compute the complex absolute value (also called norm, modulus, or
magnitude) of z.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cabs functions return the complex absolute value.
<h5><a name="7.3.8.2" href="#7.3.8.2">7.3.8.2 The cpow functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
long double complex cpowl(long double complex x,
long double complex y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cpow functions compute the complex power function xy , with a branch cut for the
first parameter along the negative real axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cpow functions return the complex power function value.
<!--page 190 -->
<h5><a name="7.3.8.3" href="#7.3.8.3">7.3.8.3 The csqrt functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex csqrtf(float complex z);
long double complex csqrtl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The csqrt functions compute the complex square root of z, with a branch cut along the
negative real axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The csqrt functions return the complex square root value, in the range of the right half-
plane (including the imaginary axis).
<h4><a name="7.3.9" href="#7.3.9">7.3.9 Manipulation functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.3.9.1" href="#7.3.9.1">7.3.9.1 The carg functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float cargf(float complex z);
long double cargl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The carg functions compute the argument (also called phase angle) of z, with a branch
cut along the negative real axis.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The carg functions return the value of the argument in the interval [-pi , +pi ].
<h5><a name="7.3.9.2" href="#7.3.9.2">7.3.9.2 The cimag functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 191 -->
<pre>
float cimagf(float complex z);
long double cimagl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cimag functions compute the imaginary part of z.<sup><a href="#note170"><b>170)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cimag functions return the imaginary part value (as a real).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note170" href="#note170">170)</a> For a variable z of complex type, z == creal(z) + cimag(z)*I.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.3.9.3" href="#7.3.9.3">7.3.9.3 The conj functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex conjf(float complex z);
long double complex conjl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The conj functions compute the complex conjugate of z, by reversing the sign of its
imaginary part.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The conj functions return the complex conjugate value.
<h5><a name="7.3.9.4" href="#7.3.9.4">7.3.9.4 The cproj functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float complex cprojf(float complex z);
long double complex cprojl(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cproj functions compute a projection of z onto the Riemann sphere: z projects to
z except that all complex infinities (even those with one infinite part and one NaN part)
<pre>
INFINITY + I * copysign(0.0, cimag(z))
</pre>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cproj functions return the value of the projection onto the Riemann sphere.
<!--page 192 -->
<h5><a name="7.3.9.5" href="#7.3.9.5">7.3.9.5 The creal functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.3"><complex.h></a>
float crealf(float complex z);
long double creall(long double complex z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The creal functions compute the real part of z.<sup><a href="#note171"><b>171)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The creal functions return the real part value.
<!--page 193 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note171" href="#note171">171)</a> For a variable z of complex type, z == creal(z) + cimag(z)*I.
</small>
characters.<sup><a href="#note173"><b>173)</b></a></sup> All letters and digits are printing characters.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: EOF (<a href="#7.19.1">7.19.1</a>), localization (<a href="#7.11">7.11</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note172" href="#note172">172)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.2">7.26.2</a>).
</small>
<p><small><a name="note173" href="#note173">173)</a> In an implementation that uses the seven-bit US ASCII character set, the printing characters are those
argument c conforms to that in the description of the function.
<h5><a name="7.4.1.1" href="#7.4.1.1">7.4.1.1 The isalnum function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int isalnum(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isalnum function tests for any character for which isalpha or isdigit is true.
<h5><a name="7.4.1.2" href="#7.4.1.2">7.4.1.2 The isalpha function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int isalpha(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isalpha function tests for any character for which isupper or islower is true,
or any character that is one of a locale-specific set of alphabetic characters for which
none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or isspace is true.<sup><a href="#note174"><b>174)</b></a></sup> In the "C" locale,
isalpha returns true only for the characters for which isupper or islower is true.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note174" href="#note174">174)</a> The functions islower and isupper test true or false separately for each of these additional
characters; all four combinations are possible.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.4.1.3" href="#7.4.1.3">7.4.1.3 The isblank function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int isblank(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isblank function tests for any character that is a standard blank character or is one
of a locale-specific set of characters for which isspace is true and that is used to
for the standard blank characters.
<h5><a name="7.4.1.4" href="#7.4.1.4">7.4.1.4 The iscntrl function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int iscntrl(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iscntrl function tests for any control character.
<h5><a name="7.4.1.5" href="#7.4.1.5">7.4.1.5 The isdigit function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int isdigit(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isdigit function tests for any decimal-digit character (as defined in <a href="#5.2.1">5.2.1</a>).
<h5><a name="7.4.1.6" href="#7.4.1.6">7.4.1.6 The isgraph function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
<!--page 195 -->
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isgraph function tests for any printing character except space (' ').
<h5><a name="7.4.1.7" href="#7.4.1.7">7.4.1.7 The islower function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int islower(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The islower function tests for any character that is a lowercase letter or is one of a
locale-specific set of characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or
letters (as defined in <a href="#5.2.1">5.2.1</a>).
<h5><a name="7.4.1.8" href="#7.4.1.8">7.4.1.8 The isprint function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int isprint(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isprint function tests for any printing character including space (' ').
<h5><a name="7.4.1.9" href="#7.4.1.9">7.4.1.9 The ispunct function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int ispunct(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ispunct function tests for any printing character that is one of a locale-specific set
of punctuation characters for which neither isspace nor isalnum is true. In the "C"
nor isalnum is true.
<h5><a name="7.4.1.10" href="#7.4.1.10">7.4.1.10 The isspace function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int isspace(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isspace function tests for any character that is a standard white-space character or
is one of a locale-specific set of characters for which isalnum is false. The standard
"C" locale, isspace returns true only for the standard white-space characters.
<h5><a name="7.4.1.11" href="#7.4.1.11">7.4.1.11 The isupper function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int isupper(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isupper function tests for any character that is an uppercase letter or is one of a
locale-specific set of characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or
letters (as defined in <a href="#5.2.1">5.2.1</a>).
<h5><a name="7.4.1.12" href="#7.4.1.12">7.4.1.12 The isxdigit function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int isxdigit(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isxdigit function tests for any hexadecimal-digit character (as defined in <a href="#6.4.4.1">6.4.4.1</a>).
<h4><a name="7.4.2" href="#7.4.2">7.4.2 Character case mapping functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.4.2.1" href="#7.4.2.1">7.4.2.1 The tolower function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int tolower(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The tolower function converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the argument is a character for which isupper is true and there are one or more
corresponding characters, as specified by the current locale, for which islower is true,
<!--page 197 -->
<h5><a name="7.4.2.2" href="#7.4.2.2">7.4.2.2 The toupper function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.4"><ctype.h></a>
int toupper(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The toupper function converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the argument is a character for which islower is true and there are one or more
corresponding characters, as specified by the current locale, for which isupper is true,
<!--page 199 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note175" href="#note175">175)</a> The macro errno need not be the identifier of an object. It might expand to a modifiable lvalue
resulting from a function call (for example, *errno()).
</small>
FE_ and an uppercase letter, and having type ''pointer to const-qualified fenv_t'', may
also be specified by the implementation.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note178" href="#note178">178)</a> This header is designed to support the floating-point exception status flags and directed-rounding
control modes required by IEC 60559, and other similar floating-point state information. Also it is
designed to facilitate code portability among all systems.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.6.1" href="#7.6.1">7.6.1 The FENV_ACCESS pragma</a></h4>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS on-off-switch
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The FENV_ACCESS pragma provides a means to inform the implementation when a
program might access the floating-point environment to test floating-point status flags or
contain an appropriately placed invocation of #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON.<sup><a href="#note185"><b>185)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note184" href="#note184">184)</a> The purpose of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is to allow certain optimizations that could subvert flag
tests and mode changes (e.g., global common subexpression elimination, code motion, and constant
folding). In general, if the state of FENV_ACCESS is ''off'', the translator can assume that default
FE_OVERFLOW | FE_INEXACT. For other argument values the behavior of these
functions is undefined.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note186" href="#note186">186)</a> The functions fetestexcept, feraiseexcept, and feclearexcept support the basic
abstraction of flags that are either set or clear. An implementation may endow floating-point status
flags with more information -- for example, the address of the code which first raised the floating-
</small>
<h5><a name="7.6.2.1" href="#7.6.2.1">7.6.2.1 The feclearexcept function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int feclearexcept(int excepts);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The feclearexcept function attempts to clear the supported floating-point exceptions
represented by its argument.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The feclearexcept function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all
the specified exceptions were successfully cleared. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
<!--page 203 -->
<h5><a name="7.6.2.2" href="#7.6.2.2">7.6.2.2 The fegetexceptflag function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int fegetexceptflag(fexcept_t *flagp,
int excepts);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fegetexceptflag function attempts to store an implementation-defined
representation of the states of the floating-point status flags indicated by the argument
excepts in the object pointed to by the argument flagp.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fegetexceptflag function returns zero if the representation was successfully
stored. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
<h5><a name="7.6.2.3" href="#7.6.2.3">7.6.2.3 The feraiseexcept function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int feraiseexcept(int excepts);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The feraiseexcept function attempts to raise the supported floating-point exceptions
represented by its argument.<sup><a href="#note187"><b>187)</b></a></sup> The order in which these floating-point exceptions are
raised is unspecified, except as stated in <a href="#F.7.6">F.7.6</a>. Whether the feraiseexcept function
additionally raises the ''inexact'' floating-point exception whenever it raises the
''overflow'' or ''underflow'' floating-point exception is implementation-defined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The feraiseexcept function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all
the specified exceptions were successfully raised. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
<!--page 204 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note187" href="#note187">187)</a> The effect is intended to be similar to that of floating-point exceptions raised by arithmetic operations.
Hence, enabled traps for floating-point exceptions raised by this function are taken. The specification
in <a href="#F.7.6">F.7.6</a> is in the same spirit.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.6.2.4" href="#7.6.2.4">7.6.2.4 The fesetexceptflag function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int fesetexceptflag(const fexcept_t *flagp,
int excepts);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fesetexceptflag function attempts to set the floating-point status flags
indicated by the argument excepts to the states stored in the object pointed to by
fegetexceptflag whose second argument represented at least those floating-point
exceptions represented by the argument excepts. This function does not raise floating-
point exceptions, but only sets the state of the flags.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fesetexceptflag function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if
all the specified flags were successfully set to the appropriate state. Otherwise, it returns
a nonzero value.
<h5><a name="7.6.2.5" href="#7.6.2.5">7.6.2.5 The fetestexcept function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int fetestexcept(int excepts);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fetestexcept function determines which of a specified subset of the floating-
point exception flags are currently set. The excepts argument specifies the floating-
point status flags to be queried.<sup><a href="#note188"><b>188)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fetestexcept function returns the value of the bitwise OR of the floating-point
exception macros corresponding to the currently set floating-point exceptions included in
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note188" href="#note188">188)</a> This mechanism allows testing several floating-point exceptions with just one function call.
</small>
modes.
<h5><a name="7.6.3.1" href="#7.6.3.1">7.6.3.1 The fegetround function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int fegetround(void);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fegetround function gets the current rounding direction.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fegetround function returns the value of the rounding direction macro
representing the current rounding direction or a negative value if there is no such
rounding direction macro or the current rounding direction is not determinable.
<h5><a name="7.6.3.2" href="#7.6.3.2">7.6.3.2 The fesetround function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int fesetround(int round);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fesetround function establishes the rounding direction represented by its
argument round. If the argument is not equal to the value of a rounding direction macro,
the rounding direction is not changed.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fesetround function returns zero if and only if the requested rounding direction
was established.
control modes -- as one entity.
<h5><a name="7.6.4.1" href="#7.6.4.1">7.6.4.1 The fegetenv function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int fegetenv(fenv_t *envp);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fegetenv function attempts to store the current floating-point environment in the
object pointed to by envp.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fegetenv function returns zero if the environment was successfully stored.
Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
<h5><a name="7.6.4.2" href="#7.6.4.2">7.6.4.2 The feholdexcept function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int feholdexcept(fenv_t *envp);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The feholdexcept function saves the current floating-point environment in the object
pointed to by envp, clears the floating-point status flags, and then installs a non-stop
(continue on floating-point exceptions) mode, if available, for all floating-point
exceptions.<sup><a href="#note189"><b>189)</b></a></sup>
<!--page 207 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The feholdexcept function returns zero if and only if non-stop floating-point
exception handling was successfully installed.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note189" href="#note189">189)</a> IEC 60559 systems have a default non-stop mode, and typically at least one other mode for trap
handling or aborting; if the system provides only the non-stop mode then installing it is trivial. For
such systems, the feholdexcept function can be used in conjunction with the feupdateenv
</small>
<h5><a name="7.6.4.3" href="#7.6.4.3">7.6.4.3 The fesetenv function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int fesetenv(const fenv_t *envp);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fesetenv function attempts to establish the floating-point environment represented
by the object pointed to by envp. The argument envp shall point to an object set by a
call to fegetenv or feholdexcept, or equal a floating-point environment macro.
Note that fesetenv merely installs the state of the floating-point status flags
represented through its argument, and does not raise these floating-point exceptions.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fesetenv function returns zero if the environment was successfully established.
Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
<h5><a name="7.6.4.4" href="#7.6.4.4">7.6.4.4 The feupdateenv function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>
int feupdateenv(const fenv_t *envp);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The feupdateenv function attempts to save the currently raised floating-point
exceptions in its automatic storage, install the floating-point environment represented by
the object pointed to by envp, and then raise the saved floating-point exceptions. The
argument envp shall point to an object set by a call to feholdexcept or fegetenv,
or equal a floating-point environment macro.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The feupdateenv function returns zero if all the actions were successfully carried out.
Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: integer types <a href="#7.18"><stdint.h></a> (<a href="#7.18">7.18</a>), formatted input/output
functions (<a href="#7.19.6">7.19.6</a>), formatted wide character input/output functions (<a href="#7.24.2">7.24.2</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note190" href="#note190">190)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.4">7.26.4</a>).
</small>
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note191" href="#note191">191)</a> C++ implementations should define these macros only when __STDC_FORMAT_MACROS is defined
before <a href="#7.8"><inttypes.h></a> is included.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.8.2" href="#7.8.2">7.8.2 Functions for greatest-width integer types</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.8.2.1" href="#7.8.2.1">7.8.2.1 The imaxabs function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.8"><inttypes.h></a>
intmax_t imaxabs(intmax_t j);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The imaxabs function computes the absolute value of an integer j. If the result cannot
be represented, the behavior is undefined.<sup><a href="#note193"><b>193)</b></a></sup>
<!--page 212 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The imaxabs function returns the absolute value.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note193" href="#note193">193)</a> The absolute value of the most negative number cannot be represented in two's complement.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.8.2.2" href="#7.8.2.2">7.8.2.2 The imaxdiv function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.8"><inttypes.h></a>
imaxdiv_t imaxdiv(intmax_t numer, intmax_t denom);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The imaxdiv function computes numer / denom and numer % denom in a single
operation.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The imaxdiv function returns a structure of type imaxdiv_t comprising both the
quotient and the remainder. The structure shall contain (in either order) the members
either part of the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.
<h5><a name="7.8.2.3" href="#7.8.2.3">7.8.2.3 The strtoimax and strtoumax functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.8"><inttypes.h></a>
uintmax_t strtoumax(const char * restrict nptr,
char ** restrict endptr, int base);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strtoimax and strtoumax functions are equivalent to the strtol, strtoll,
strtoul, and strtoull functions, except that the initial portion of the string is
converted to intmax_t and uintmax_t representation, respectively.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strtoimax and strtoumax functions return the converted value, if any. If no
conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range
<!--page 213 -->
<h5><a name="7.8.2.4" href="#7.8.2.4">7.8.2.4 The wcstoimax and wcstoumax functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.17"><stddef.h></a> // for wchar_t
uintmax_t wcstoumax(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcstoimax and wcstoumax functions are equivalent to the wcstol, wcstoll,
wcstoul, and wcstoull functions except that the initial portion of the wide string is
converted to intmax_t and uintmax_t representation, respectively.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcstoimax function returns the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be
performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable
with the characters LC_ and an uppercase letter,<sup><a href="#note195"><b>195)</b></a></sup> may also be specified by the
implementation.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note194" href="#note194">194)</a> ISO/IEC 9945-2 specifies locale and charmap formats that may be used to specify locales for C.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note195" href="#note195">195)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.5">7.26.5</a>).
<h4><a name="7.11.1" href="#7.11.1">7.11.1 Locale control</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.11.1.1" href="#7.11.1.1">7.11.1.1 The setlocale function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.11"><locale.h></a>
char *setlocale(int category, const char *locale);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The setlocale function selects the appropriate portion of the program's locale as
specified by the category and locale arguments. The setlocale function may be
is executed.
<p><!--para 5 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the setlocale function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
If a pointer to a string is given for locale and the selection can be honored, the
setlocale function returns a pointer to the string associated with the specified
(<a href="#7.20.8">7.20.8</a>), numeric conversion functions (<a href="#7.20.1">7.20.1</a>), the strcoll function (<a href="#7.21.4.3">7.21.4.3</a>), the
strftime function (<a href="#7.23.3.5">7.23.3.5</a>), the strxfrm function (<a href="#7.21.4.5">7.21.4.5</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note196" href="#note196">196)</a> The only functions in <a href="#7.4">7.4</a> whose behavior is not affected by the current locale are isdigit and
isxdigit.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.11.2" href="#7.11.2">7.11.2 Numeric formatting convention inquiry</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.11.2.1" href="#7.11.2.1">7.11.2.1 The localeconv function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.11"><locale.h></a>
struct lconv *localeconv(void);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The localeconv function sets the components of an object with type struct lconv
with values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities (monetary and otherwise)
<p><!--para 7 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the localeconv
function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
The localeconv function returns a pointer to the filled-in object. The structure
pointed to by the return value shall not be modified by the program, but may be
shall define the macros FE_DIVBYZERO, FE_INVALID, and FE_OVERFLOW in
<a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note198" href="#note198">198)</a> Particularly on systems with wide expression evaluation, a <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a> function might pass arguments
and return values in wider format than the synopsis prototype indicates.
</small>
math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, whether the ''underflow''
floating-point exception is raised is implementation-defined.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note203" href="#note203">203)</a> In an implementation that supports infinities, this allows an infinity as an argument to be a domain
error if the mathematical domain of the function does not include the infinity.
</small>
</small>
<h4><a name="7.12.2" href="#7.12.2">7.12.2 The FP_CONTRACT pragma</a></h4>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
#pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT on-off-switch
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The FP_CONTRACT pragma can be used to allow (if the state is ''on'') or disallow (if the
state is ''off'') the implementation to contract expressions (<a href="#6.5">6.5</a>). Each pragma can occur
expression of real floating type.
<h5><a name="7.12.3.1" href="#7.12.3.1">7.12.3.1 The fpclassify macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int fpclassify(real-floating x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fpclassify macro classifies its argument value as NaN, infinite, normal,
subnormal, zero, or into another implementation-defined category. First, an argument
represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type.
Then classification is based on the type of the argument.<sup><a href="#note205"><b>205)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fpclassify macro returns the value of the number classification macro
appropriate to the value of its argument.
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note205" href="#note205">205)</a> Since an expression can be evaluated with more range and precision than its type has, it is important to
know the type that classification is based on. For example, a normal long double value might
become subnormal when converted to double, and zero when converted to float.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.12.3.2" href="#7.12.3.2">7.12.3.2 The isfinite macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int isfinite(real-floating x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isfinite macro determines whether its argument has a finite value (zero,
subnormal, or normal, and not infinite or NaN). First, an argument represented in a
<!--page 229 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The isfinite macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a finite
value.
<h5><a name="7.12.3.3" href="#7.12.3.3">7.12.3.3 The isinf macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int isinf(real-floating x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isinf macro determines whether its argument value is an infinity (positive or
negative). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is
converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The isinf macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has an infinite
value.
<h5><a name="7.12.3.4" href="#7.12.3.4">7.12.3.4 The isnan macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int isnan(real-floating x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isnan macro determines whether its argument value is a NaN. First, an argument
represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type.
Then determination is based on the type of the argument.<sup><a href="#note206"><b>206)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The isnan macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a NaN value.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note206" href="#note206">206)</a> For the isnan macro, the type for determination does not matter unless the implementation supports
NaNs in the evaluation type but not in the semantic type.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.12.3.5" href="#7.12.3.5">7.12.3.5 The isnormal macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
<!--page 230 -->
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isnormal macro determines whether its argument value is normal (neither zero,
subnormal, infinite, nor NaN). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its
semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type
of the argument.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The isnormal macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a normal
value.
<h5><a name="7.12.3.6" href="#7.12.3.6">7.12.3.6 The signbit macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int signbit(real-floating x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The signbit macro determines whether the sign of its argument value is negative.<sup><a href="#note207"><b>207)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The signbit macro returns a nonzero value if and only if the sign of its argument value
is negative.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note207" href="#note207">207)</a> The signbit macro reports the sign of all values, including infinities, zeros, and NaNs. If zero is
unsigned, it is treated as positive.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.12.4" href="#7.12.4">7.12.4 Trigonometric functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.4.1" href="#7.12.4.1">7.12.4.1 The acos functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float acosf(float x);
long double acosl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The acos functions compute the principal value of the arc cosine of x. A domain error
occurs for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1].
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The acos functions return arccos x in the interval [0, pi ] radians.
<!--page 231 -->
<h5><a name="7.12.4.2" href="#7.12.4.2">7.12.4.2 The asin functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float asinf(float x);
long double asinl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The asin functions compute the principal value of the arc sine of x. A domain error
occurs for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1].
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The asin functions return arcsin x in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2] radians.
<h5><a name="7.12.4.3" href="#7.12.4.3">7.12.4.3 The atan functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float atanf(float x);
long double atanl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The atan functions compute the principal value of the arc tangent of x.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The atan functions return arctan x in the interval [-pi /2, +pi /2] radians.
<h5><a name="7.12.4.4" href="#7.12.4.4">7.12.4.4 The atan2 functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float atan2f(float y, float x);
long double atan2l(long double y, long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The atan2 functions compute the value of the arc tangent of y/x, using the signs of both
arguments to determine the quadrant of the return value. A domain error may occur if
both arguments are zero.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The atan2 functions return arctan y/x in the interval [-pi , +pi ] radians.
<!--page 232 -->
<h5><a name="7.12.4.5" href="#7.12.4.5">7.12.4.5 The cos functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float cosf(float x);
long double cosl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cos functions compute the cosine of x (measured in radians).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cos functions return cos x.
<h5><a name="7.12.4.6" href="#7.12.4.6">7.12.4.6 The sin functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float sinf(float x);
long double sinl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The sin functions compute the sine of x (measured in radians).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The sin functions return sin x.
<h5><a name="7.12.4.7" href="#7.12.4.7">7.12.4.7 The tan functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float tanf(float x);
long double tanl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The tan functions return the tangent of x (measured in radians).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The tan functions return tan x.
<!--page 233 -->
<h4><a name="7.12.5" href="#7.12.5">7.12.5 Hyperbolic functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.5.1" href="#7.12.5.1">7.12.5.1 The acosh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float acoshf(float x);
long double acoshl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The acosh functions compute the (nonnegative) arc hyperbolic cosine of x. A domain
error occurs for arguments less than 1.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The acosh functions return arcosh x in the interval [0, +(inf)].
<h5><a name="7.12.5.2" href="#7.12.5.2">7.12.5.2 The asinh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float asinhf(float x);
long double asinhl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The asinh functions compute the arc hyperbolic sine of x.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The asinh functions return arsinh x.
<h5><a name="7.12.5.3" href="#7.12.5.3">7.12.5.3 The atanh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float atanhf(float x);
long double atanhl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The atanh functions compute the arc hyperbolic tangent of x. A domain error occurs
for arguments not in the interval [-1, +1]. A range error may occur if the argument
equals -1 or +1.
<!--page 234 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The atanh functions return artanh x.
<h5><a name="7.12.5.4" href="#7.12.5.4">7.12.5.4 The cosh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float coshf(float x);
long double coshl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cosh functions compute the hyperbolic cosine of x. A range error occurs if the
magnitude of x is too large.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cosh functions return cosh x.
<h5><a name="7.12.5.5" href="#7.12.5.5">7.12.5.5 The sinh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float sinhf(float x);
long double sinhl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The sinh functions compute the hyperbolic sine of x. A range error occurs if the
magnitude of x is too large.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The sinh functions return sinh x.
<h5><a name="7.12.5.6" href="#7.12.5.6">7.12.5.6 The tanh functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float tanhf(float x);
long double tanhl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The tanh functions compute the hyperbolic tangent of x.
<!--page 235 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The tanh functions return tanh x.
<h4><a name="7.12.6" href="#7.12.6">7.12.6 Exponential and logarithmic functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.6.1" href="#7.12.6.1">7.12.6.1 The exp functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float expf(float x);
long double expl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The exp functions compute the base-e exponential of x. A range error occurs if the
magnitude of x is too large.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The exp functions return e<sup>x</sup>.
<h5><a name="7.12.6.2" href="#7.12.6.2">7.12.6.2 The exp2 functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float exp2f(float x);
long double exp2l(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The exp2 functions compute the base-2 exponential of x. A range error occurs if the
magnitude of x is too large.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The exp2 functions return 2<sup>x</sup>.
<h5><a name="7.12.6.3" href="#7.12.6.3">7.12.6.3 The expm1 functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 236 -->
<pre>
float expm1f(float x);
long double expm1l(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The expm1 functions compute the base-e exponential of the argument, minus 1. A range
error occurs if x is too large.<sup><a href="#note208"><b>208)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The expm1 functions return e<sup>x</sup> - 1.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note208" href="#note208">208)</a> For small magnitude x, expm1(x) is expected to be more accurate than exp(x) - 1.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.12.6.4" href="#7.12.6.4">7.12.6.4 The frexp functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float frexpf(float value, int *exp);
long double frexpl(long double value, int *exp);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The frexp functions break a floating-point number into a normalized fraction and an
integral power of 2. They store the integer in the int object pointed to by exp.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If value is not a floating-point number, the results are unspecified. Otherwise, the
frexp functions return the value x, such that x has a magnitude in the interval [1/2, 1) or
zero, and value equals x 2<sup>*exp</sup> . If value is zero, both parts of the result are zero.
<h5><a name="7.12.6.5" href="#7.12.6.5">7.12.6.5 The ilogb functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int ilogbf(float x);
int ilogbl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ilogb functions extract the exponent of x as a signed int value. If x is zero they
compute the value FP_ILOGB0; if x is infinite they compute the value INT_MAX; if x is
<!--page 237 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ilogb functions return the exponent of x as a signed int value.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the logb functions (<a href="#7.12.6.11">7.12.6.11</a>).
<h5><a name="7.12.6.6" href="#7.12.6.6">7.12.6.6 The ldexp functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float ldexpf(float x, int exp);
long double ldexpl(long double x, int exp);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ldexp functions multiply a floating-point number by an integral power of 2. A
range error may occur.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ldexp functions return x 2<sup>exp</sup> .
<h5><a name="7.12.6.7" href="#7.12.6.7">7.12.6.7 The log functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float logf(float x);
long double logl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The log functions compute the base-e (natural) logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if
the argument is negative. A range error may occur if the argument is zero.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The log functions return loge x.
<h5><a name="7.12.6.8" href="#7.12.6.8">7.12.6.8 The log10 functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 238 -->
<pre>
float log10f(float x);
long double log10l(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The log10 functions compute the base-10 (common) logarithm of x. A domain error
occurs if the argument is negative. A range error may occur if the argument is zero.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The log10 functions return log10 x.
<h5><a name="7.12.6.9" href="#7.12.6.9">7.12.6.9 The log1p functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float log1pf(float x);
long double log1pl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The log1p functions compute the base-e (natural) logarithm of 1 plus the argument.<sup><a href="#note209"><b>209)</b></a></sup>
A domain error occurs if the argument is less than -1. A range error may occur if the
argument equals -1.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The log1p functions return loge (1 + x).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note209" href="#note209">209)</a> For small magnitude x, log1p(x) is expected to be more accurate than log(1 + x).
</small>
<h5><a name="7.12.6.10" href="#7.12.6.10">7.12.6.10 The log2 functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float log2f(float x);
long double log2l(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The log2 functions compute the base-2 logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if the
argument is less than zero. A range error may occur if the argument is zero.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The log2 functions return log2 x.
<!--page 239 -->
<h5><a name="7.12.6.11" href="#7.12.6.11">7.12.6.11 The logb functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float logbf(float x);
long double logbl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The logb functions extract the exponent of x, as a signed integer value in floating-point
format. If x is subnormal it is treated as though it were normalized; thus, for positive
1 <= x FLT_RADIX<sup>-logb(x)</sup> < FLT_RADIX
</pre>
A domain error or range error may occur if the argument is zero.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The logb functions return the signed exponent of x.
<h5><a name="7.12.6.12" href="#7.12.6.12">7.12.6.12 The modf functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float modff(float value, float *iptr);
long double modfl(long double value, long double *iptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The modf functions break the argument value into integral and fractional parts, each of
which has the same type and sign as the argument. They store the integral part (in
floating-point format) in the object pointed to by iptr.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The modf functions return the signed fractional part of value.
<!--page 240 -->
<h5><a name="7.12.6.13" href="#7.12.6.13">7.12.6.13 The scalbn and scalbln functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float scalblnf(float x, long int n);
long double scalblnl(long double x, long int n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The scalbn and scalbln functions compute x FLT_RADIX<sup>n</sup> efficiently, not
normally by computing FLT_RADIX<sup>n</sup> explicitly. A range error may occur.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The scalbn and scalbln functions return x FLT_RADIX<sup>n</sup> .
<h4><a name="7.12.7" href="#7.12.7">7.12.7 Power and absolute-value functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.7.1" href="#7.12.7.1">7.12.7.1 The cbrt functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float cbrtf(float x);
long double cbrtl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The cbrt functions compute the real cube root of x.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The cbrt functions return x<sup>1/3</sup>.
<h5><a name="7.12.7.2" href="#7.12.7.2">7.12.7.2 The fabs functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float fabsf(float x);
long double fabsl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fabs functions compute the absolute value of a floating-point number x.
<!--page 241 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fabs functions return | x |.
<h5><a name="7.12.7.3" href="#7.12.7.3">7.12.7.3 The hypot functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float hypotf(float x, float y);
long double hypotl(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The hypot functions compute the square root of the sum of the squares of x and y,
without undue overflow or underflow. A range error may occur.
<p><!--para 3 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The hypot functions return (sqrt)(x<sup>2</sup> + y<sup>2</sup>).
<h5><a name="7.12.7.4" href="#7.12.7.4">7.12.7.4 The pow functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float powf(float x, float y);
long double powl(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The pow functions compute x raised to the power y. A domain error occurs if x is finite
and negative and y is finite and not an integer value. A range error may occur. A domain
error may occur if x is zero and y is zero. A domain error or range error may occur if x
is zero and y is less than zero.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The pow functions return x<sup>y</sup>.
<h5><a name="7.12.7.5" href="#7.12.7.5">7.12.7.5 The sqrt functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 242 -->
<pre>
float sqrtf(float x);
long double sqrtl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The sqrt functions compute the nonnegative square root of x. A domain error occurs if
the argument is less than zero.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The sqrt functions return (sqrt)(x).
<h4><a name="7.12.8" href="#7.12.8">7.12.8 Error and gamma functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.8.1" href="#7.12.8.1">7.12.8.1 The erf functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float erff(float x);
long double erfl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The erf functions compute the error function of x.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The erf functions return
<pre>
</pre>
<h5><a name="7.12.8.2" href="#7.12.8.2">7.12.8.2 The erfc functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float erfcf(float x);
long double erfcl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The erfc functions compute the complementary error function of x. A range error
occurs if x is too large.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The erfc functions return
<pre>
<!--page 243 -->
<h5><a name="7.12.8.3" href="#7.12.8.3">7.12.8.3 The lgamma functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float lgammaf(float x);
long double lgammal(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The lgamma functions compute the natural logarithm of the absolute value of gamma of
x. A range error occurs if x is too large. A range error may occur if x is a negative
integer or zero.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The lgamma functions return loge | (Gamma)(x) |.
<h5><a name="7.12.8.4" href="#7.12.8.4">7.12.8.4 The tgamma functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float tgammaf(float x);
long double tgammal(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The tgamma functions compute the gamma function of x. A domain error or range error
may occur if x is a negative integer or zero. A range error may occur if the magnitude of
x is too large or too small.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The tgamma functions return (Gamma)(x).
<h4><a name="7.12.9" href="#7.12.9">7.12.9 Nearest integer functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.9.1" href="#7.12.9.1">7.12.9.1 The ceil functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float ceilf(float x);
long double ceill(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ceil functions compute the smallest integer value not less than x.
<!--page 244 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ceil functions return [^x^], expressed as a floating-point number.
<h5><a name="7.12.9.2" href="#7.12.9.2">7.12.9.2 The floor functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float floorf(float x);
long double floorl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The floor functions compute the largest integer value not greater than x.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The floor functions return [_x_], expressed as a floating-point number.
<h5><a name="7.12.9.3" href="#7.12.9.3">7.12.9.3 The nearbyint functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float nearbyintf(float x);
long double nearbyintl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The nearbyint functions round their argument to an integer value in floating-point
format, using the current rounding direction and without raising the ''inexact'' floating-
point exception.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The nearbyint functions return the rounded integer value.
<h5><a name="7.12.9.4" href="#7.12.9.4">7.12.9.4 The rint functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float rintf(float x);
long double rintl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The rint functions differ from the nearbyint functions (<a href="#7.12.9.3">7.12.9.3</a>) only in that the
rint functions may raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception if the result differs in
value from the argument.
<!--page 245 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The rint functions return the rounded integer value.
<h5><a name="7.12.9.5" href="#7.12.9.5">7.12.9.5 The lrint and llrint functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
long long int llrintf(float x);
long long int llrintl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The lrint and llrint functions round their argument to the nearest integer value,
rounding according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded value is outside the
range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and a domain error or range
error may occur. *
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The lrint and llrint functions return the rounded integer value.
<h5><a name="7.12.9.6" href="#7.12.9.6">7.12.9.6 The round functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float roundf(float x);
long double roundl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The round functions round their argument to the nearest integer value in floating-point
format, rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current rounding
direction.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The round functions return the rounded integer value.
<!--page 246 -->
<h5><a name="7.12.9.7" href="#7.12.9.7">7.12.9.7 The lround and llround functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
long long int llroundf(float x);
long long int llroundl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The lround and llround functions round their argument to the nearest integer value,
rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current rounding direction. If
the rounded value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified
and a domain error or range error may occur.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The lround and llround functions return the rounded integer value.
<h5><a name="7.12.9.8" href="#7.12.9.8">7.12.9.8 The trunc functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float truncf(float x);
long double truncl(long double x);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The trunc functions round their argument to the integer value, in floating format,
nearest to but no larger in magnitude than the argument.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The trunc functions return the truncated integer value.
<!--page 247 -->
<h4><a name="7.12.10" href="#7.12.10">7.12.10 Remainder functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.10.1" href="#7.12.10.1">7.12.10.1 The fmod functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float fmodf(float x, float y);
long double fmodl(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fmod functions compute the floating-point remainder of x/y.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fmod functions return the value x - ny, for some integer n such that, if y is nonzero,
the result has the same sign as x and magnitude less than the magnitude of y. If y is zero,
defined.
<h5><a name="7.12.10.2" href="#7.12.10.2">7.12.10.2 The remainder functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float remainderf(float x, float y);
long double remainderl(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The remainder functions compute the remainder x REM y required by IEC 60559.<sup><a href="#note210"><b>210)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The remainder functions return x REM y. If y is zero, whether a domain error occurs
or the functions return zero is implementation defined.
<!--page 248 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note210" href="#note210">210)</a> ''When y != 0, the remainder r = x REM y is defined regardless of the rounding mode by the
mathematical relation r = x - ny, where n is the integer nearest the exact value of x/y; whenever
| n - x/y | = 1/2, then n is even. Thus, the remainder is always exact. If r = 0, its sign shall be that of
</small>
<h5><a name="7.12.10.3" href="#7.12.10.3">7.12.10.3 The remquo functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
long double remquol(long double x, long double y,
int *quo);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The remquo functions compute the same remainder as the remainder functions. In
the object pointed to by quo they store a value whose sign is the sign of x/y and whose
magnitude is congruent modulo 2<sup>n</sup> to the magnitude of the integral quotient of x/y, where
n is an implementation-defined integer greater than or equal to 3.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The remquo functions return x REM y. If y is zero, the value stored in the object
pointed to by quo is unspecified and whether a domain error occurs or the functions
<h4><a name="7.12.11" href="#7.12.11">7.12.11 Manipulation functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.11.1" href="#7.12.11.1">7.12.11.1 The copysign functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float copysignf(float x, float y);
long double copysignl(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The copysign functions produce a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y.
They produce a NaN (with the sign of y) if x is a NaN. On implementations that
represent a signed zero but do not treat negative zero consistently in arithmetic
operations, the copysign functions regard the sign of zero as positive.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The copysign functions return a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y.
<!--page 249 -->
<h5><a name="7.12.11.2" href="#7.12.11.2">7.12.11.2 The nan functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float nanf(const char *tagp);
long double nanl(const char *tagp);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The call nan("n-char-sequence") is equivalent to strtod("NAN(n-char-
sequence)", (char**) NULL); the call nan("") is equivalent to
sequence or an empty string, the call is equivalent to strtod("NAN", (char**)
NULL). Calls to nanf and nanl are equivalent to the corresponding calls to strtof
and strtold.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The nan functions return a quiet NaN, if available, with content indicated through tagp.
If the implementation does not support quiet NaNs, the functions return zero.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (<a href="#7.20.1.3">7.20.1.3</a>).
<h5><a name="7.12.11.3" href="#7.12.11.3">7.12.11.3 The nextafter functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float nextafterf(float x, float y);
long double nextafterl(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The nextafter functions determine the next representable value, in the type of the
function, after x in the direction of y, where x and y are first converted to the type of the
function.<sup><a href="#note211"><b>211)</b></a></sup> The nextafter functions return y if x equals y. A range error may occur
if the magnitude of x is the largest finite value representable in the type and the result is
infinite or not representable in the type.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The nextafter functions return the next representable value in the specified format
after x in the direction of y.
<!--page 250 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note211" href="#note211">211)</a> The argument values are converted to the type of the function, even by a macro implementation of the
function.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.12.11.4" href="#7.12.11.4">7.12.11.4 The nexttoward functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float nexttowardf(float x, long double y);
long double nexttowardl(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The nexttoward functions are equivalent to the nextafter functions except that the
second parameter has type long double and the functions return y converted to the
type of the function if x equals y.<sup><a href="#note212"><b>212)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note212" href="#note212">212)</a> The result of the nexttoward functions is determined in the type of the function, without loss of
range or precision in a floating second argument.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.12.12" href="#7.12.12">7.12.12 Maximum, minimum, and positive difference functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.12.1" href="#7.12.12.1">7.12.12.1 The fdim functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float fdimf(float x, float y);
long double fdiml(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fdim functions determine the positive difference between their arguments:
<pre>
{+0 if x <= y
</pre>
A range error may occur.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fdim functions return the positive difference value.
<h5><a name="7.12.12.2" href="#7.12.12.2">7.12.12.2 The fmax functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
<!--page 251 -->
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fmax functions determine the maximum numeric value of their arguments.<sup><a href="#note213"><b>213)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fmax functions return the maximum numeric value of their arguments.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note213" href="#note213">213)</a> NaN arguments are treated as missing data: if one argument is a NaN and the other numeric, then the
fmax functions choose the numeric value. See <a href="#F.9.9.2">F.9.9.2</a>.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.12.12.3" href="#7.12.12.3">7.12.12.3 The fmin functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
float fminf(float x, float y);
long double fminl(long double x, long double y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fmin functions determine the minimum numeric value of their arguments.<sup><a href="#note214"><b>214)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fmin functions return the minimum numeric value of their arguments.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note214" href="#note214">214)</a> The fmin functions are analogous to the fmax functions in their treatment of NaNs.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.12.13" href="#7.12.13">7.12.13 Floating multiply-add</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.12.13.1" href="#7.12.13.1">7.12.13.1 The fma functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
long double fmal(long double x, long double y,
long double z);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fma functions compute (x y) + z, rounded as one ternary operation: they compute
the value (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the result format, according to the
current rounding mode. A range error may occur.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fma functions return (x y) + z, rounded as one ternary operation.
the synopses in this subclause, real-floating indicates that the argument shall be an
expression of real floating type.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note215" href="#note215">215)</a> IEC 60559 requires that the built-in relational operators raise the ''invalid'' floating-point exception if
the operands compare unordered, as an error indicator for programs written without consideration of
NaNs; the result in these cases is false.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.12.14.1" href="#7.12.14.1">7.12.14.1 The isgreater macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int isgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isgreater macro determines whether its first argument is greater than its second
argument. The value of isgreater(x, y) is always equal to (x) > (y); however,
unlike (x) > (y), isgreater(x, y) does not raise the ''invalid'' floating-point
exception when x and y are unordered.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The isgreater macro returns the value of (x) > (y).
<h5><a name="7.12.14.2" href="#7.12.14.2">7.12.14.2 The isgreaterequal macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int isgreaterequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isgreaterequal macro determines whether its first argument is greater than or
equal to its second argument. The value of isgreaterequal(x, y) is always equal
<!--page 253 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The isgreaterequal macro returns the value of (x) >= (y).
<h5><a name="7.12.14.3" href="#7.12.14.3">7.12.14.3 The isless macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int isless(real-floating x, real-floating y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isless macro determines whether its first argument is less than its second
argument. The value of isless(x, y) is always equal to (x) < (y); however,
unlike (x) < (y), isless(x, y) does not raise the ''invalid'' floating-point
exception when x and y are unordered.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The isless macro returns the value of (x) < (y).
<h5><a name="7.12.14.4" href="#7.12.14.4">7.12.14.4 The islessequal macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int islessequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The islessequal macro determines whether its first argument is less than or equal to
its second argument. The value of islessequal(x, y) is always equal to
(x) <= (y); however, unlike (x) <= (y), islessequal(x, y) does not raise
the ''invalid'' floating-point exception when x and y are unordered.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The islessequal macro returns the value of (x) <= (y).
<h5><a name="7.12.14.5" href="#7.12.14.5">7.12.14.5 The islessgreater macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int islessgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The islessgreater macro determines whether its first argument is less than or
greater than its second argument. The islessgreater(x, y) macro is similar to
the ''invalid'' floating-point exception when x and y are unordered (nor does it evaluate x
and y twice).
<!--page 254 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The islessgreater macro returns the value of (x) < (y) || (x) > (y).
<h5><a name="7.12.14.6" href="#7.12.14.6">7.12.14.6 The isunordered macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a>
int isunordered(real-floating x, real-floating y);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The isunordered macro determines whether its arguments are unordered.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The isunordered macro returns 1 if its arguments are unordered and 0 otherwise.
<!--page 255 -->
linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed in order to access an actual function, or a
program defines an external identifier with the name setjmp, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note216" href="#note216">216)</a> These functions are useful for dealing with unusual conditions encountered in a low-level function of
a program.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.13.1" href="#7.13.1">7.13.1 Save calling environment</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.13.1.1" href="#7.13.1.1">7.13.1.1 The setjmp macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.13"><setjmp.h></a>
int setjmp(jmp_buf env);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The setjmp macro saves its calling environment in its jmp_buf argument for later use
by the longjmp function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the return is from a direct invocation, the setjmp macro returns the value zero. If the
return is from a call to the longjmp function, the setjmp macro returns a nonzero
value.
-<h6>Environmental limits</h6>
+<p><b>Environmental limits</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
An invocation of the setjmp macro shall appear only in one of the following contexts:
<ul>
<h4><a name="7.13.2" href="#7.13.2">7.13.2 Restore calling environment</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.13.2.1" href="#7.13.2.1">7.13.2.1 The longjmp function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.13"><setjmp.h></a>
void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The longjmp function restores the environment saved by the most recent invocation of
the setjmp macro in the same invocation of the program with the corresponding
invocation of the corresponding setjmp macro that do not have volatile-qualified type
and have been changed between the setjmp invocation and longjmp call are
indeterminate.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
After longjmp is completed, program execution continues as if the corresponding
invocation of the setjmp macro had just returned the value specified by val. The
}
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note217" href="#note217">217)</a> For example, by executing a return statement or because another longjmp call has caused a
transfer to a setjmp invocation in a function earlier in the set of nested calls.
</small>
<!--page 259 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note219" href="#note219">219)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.9">7.26.9</a>). The names of the signal numbers reflect the following terms
(respectively): abort, floating-point exception, illegal instruction, interrupt, segmentation violation,
and termination.
<h4><a name="7.14.1" href="#7.14.1">7.14.1 Specify signal handling</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.14.1.1" href="#7.14.1.1">7.14.1.1 The signal function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.14"><signal.h></a>
void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The signal function chooses one of three ways in which receipt of the signal number
sig is to be subsequently handled. If the value of func is SIG_DFL, default handling
is executed for all other signals defined by the implementation.
<p><!--para 7 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the signal function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
If the request can be honored, the signal function returns the value of func for the
most recent successful call to signal for the specified signal sig. Otherwise, a value of
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the abort function (<a href="#7.20.4.1">7.20.4.1</a>), the exit function (<a href="#7.20.4.3">7.20.4.3</a>), the
_Exit function (<a href="#7.20.4.4">7.20.4.4</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note220" href="#note220">220)</a> If any signal is generated by an asynchronous signal handler, the behavior is undefined.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.14.2" href="#7.14.2">7.14.2 Send signal</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.14.2.1" href="#7.14.2.1">7.14.2.1 The raise function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.14"><signal.h></a>
int raise(int sig);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The raise function carries out the actions described in <a href="#7.14.1.1">7.14.1.1</a> for the signal sig. If a
signal handler is called, the raise function shall not return until after the signal handler
does.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The raise function returns zero if successful, nonzero if unsuccessful.
<!--page 261 -->
value of ap in the calling function is indeterminate and shall be passed to the va_end
macro prior to any further reference to ap.<sup><a href="#note221"><b>221)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note221" href="#note221">221)</a> It is permitted to create a pointer to a va_list and pass that pointer to another function, in which
case the original function may make further use of the original list after the other function returns.
</small>
function.
<h5><a name="7.15.1.1" href="#7.15.1.1">7.15.1.1 The va_arg macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
type va_arg(va_list ap, type);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The va_arg macro expands to an expression that has the specified type and the value of
the next argument in the call. The parameter ap shall have been initialized by the
type, and the value is representable in both types;
<li> one type is pointer to void and the other is a pointer to a character type.
</ul>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The first invocation of the va_arg macro after that of the va_start macro returns the
value of the argument after that specified by parmN . Successive invocations return the
values of the remaining arguments in succession.
<h5><a name="7.15.1.2" href="#7.15.1.2">7.15.1.2 The va_copy macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
void va_copy(va_list dest, va_list src);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The va_copy macro initializes dest as a copy of src, as if the va_start macro had
been applied to dest followed by the same sequence of uses of the va_arg macro as
had previously been used to reach the present state of src. Neither the va_copy nor
va_start macro shall be invoked to reinitialize dest without an intervening
invocation of the va_end macro for the same dest.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The va_copy macro returns no value.
<h5><a name="7.15.1.3" href="#7.15.1.3">7.15.1.3 The va_end macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
void va_end(va_list ap);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The va_end macro facilitates a normal return from the function whose variable
argument list was referred to by the expansion of the va_start macro, or the function
by the va_start or va_copy macro). If there is no corresponding invocation of the
va_start or va_copy macro, or if the va_end macro is not invoked before the
return, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The va_end macro returns no value.
<h5><a name="7.15.1.4" href="#7.15.1.4">7.15.1.4 The va_start macro</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
void va_start(va_list ap, parmN);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The va_start macro shall be invoked before any access to the unnamed arguments.
<p><!--para 3 -->
parmN is declared with the register storage class, with a function or array type, or
with a type that is not compatible with the type that results after application of the default
argument promotions, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
The va_start macro returns no value.
<p><!--para 6 -->
<!--page 266 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note222" href="#note222">222)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.7">7.26.7</a>).
</small>
</pre>
then the expression &(t.member-designator) evaluates to an address constant. (If the
specified member is a bit-field, the behavior is undefined.)
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The types used for size_t and ptrdiff_t should not have an integer conversion rank
greater than that of signed long int unless the implementation supports objects
shall provide those types described as ''required'', but need not provide any of the others
(described as ''optional'').
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note223" href="#note223">223)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.8">7.26.8</a>).
</small>
<p><small><a name="note224" href="#note224">224)</a> Some of these types may denote implementation-defined extended integer types.
</pre>
All other types of this form are optional.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note225" href="#note225">225)</a> The designated type is not guaranteed to be fastest for all purposes; if the implementation has no clear
grounds for choosing one type over another, it will simply pick some integer type satisfying the
signedness and width requirements.
magnitude (absolute value) than the corresponding value given below, with the same sign,
except where stated to be exactly the given value.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note226" href="#note226">226)</a> C++ implementations should define these macros only when __STDC_LIMIT_MACROS is defined
before <a href="#7.18"><stdint.h></a> is included.
</small>
otherwise, wint_t is defined as an unsigned integer type, and the value of WINT_MIN
shall be 0 and the value of WINT_MAX shall be no less than 65535.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note227" href="#note227">227)</a> C++ implementations should define these macros only when __STDC_LIMIT_MACROS is defined
before <a href="#7.18"><stdint.h></a> is included.
</small>
<!--page 273 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note230" href="#note230">230)</a> C++ implementations should define these macros only when __STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS is
defined before <a href="#7.18"><stdint.h></a> is included.
</small>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: files (<a href="#7.19.3">7.19.3</a>), the fseek function (<a href="#7.19.9.2">7.19.9.2</a>), streams (<a href="#7.19.2">7.19.2</a>), the
tmpnam function (<a href="#7.19.4.4">7.19.4.4</a>), <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a> (<a href="#7.24">7.24</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note231" href="#note231">231)</a> If the implementation imposes no practical limit on the length of file name strings, the value of
FILENAME_MAX should instead be the recommended size of an array intended to hold a file name
string. Of course, file name string contents are subject to other system-specific constraints; therefore
value of this mbstate_t object as part of the value of the fpos_t object. A later
successful call to fsetpos using the same stored fpos_t value restores the value of
the associated mbstate_t object as well as the position within the controlled stream.
-<h6>Environmental limits</h6>
+<p><b>Environmental limits</b>
<p><!--para 7 -->
An implementation shall support text files with lines containing at least 254 characters,
including the terminating new-line character. The value of the macro BUFSIZ shall be at
<!--page 278 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note232" href="#note232">232)</a> An implementation need not distinguish between text streams and binary streams. In such an
implementation, there need be no new-line characters in a text stream nor any limit to the length of a
line.
multibyte character. The wide character input/output functions and the byte input/output
functions store the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno if and only if an encoding error
occurs.
-<h6>Environmental limits</h6>
+<p><b>Environmental limits</b>
<p><!--para 15 -->
The value of FOPEN_MAX shall be at least eight, including the three standard text
streams.
fputwc function (<a href="#7.24.3.3">7.24.3.3</a>), conversion state (<a href="#7.24.6">7.24.6</a>), the mbrtowc function
(<a href="#7.24.6.3.2">7.24.6.3.2</a>), the wcrtomb function (<a href="#7.24.6.3.3">7.24.6.3.3</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note234" href="#note234">234)</a> Setting the file position indicator to end-of-file, as with fseek(file, 0, SEEK_END), has
undefined behavior for a binary stream (because of possible trailing null characters) or for any stream
with state-dependent encoding that does not assuredly end in the initial shift state.
<h4><a name="7.19.4" href="#7.19.4">7.19.4 Operations on files</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.19.4.1" href="#7.19.4.1">7.19.4.1 The remove function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int remove(const char *filename);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The remove function causes the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename
to be no longer accessible by that name. A subsequent attempt to open that file using that
name will fail, unless it is created anew. If the file is open, the behavior of the remove
function is implementation-defined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The remove function returns zero if the operation succeeds, nonzero if it fails.
<h5><a name="7.19.4.2" href="#7.19.4.2">7.19.4.2 The rename function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int rename(const char *old, const char *new);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The rename function causes the file whose name is the string pointed to by old to be
henceforth known by the name given by the string pointed to by new. The file named
old is no longer accessible by that name. If a file named by the string pointed to by new
exists prior to the call to the rename function, the behavior is implementation-defined.
<!--page 281 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The rename function returns zero if the operation succeeds, nonzero if it fails,<sup><a href="#note235"><b>235)</b></a></sup> in
which case if the file existed previously it is still known by its original name.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note235" href="#note235">235)</a> Among the reasons the implementation may cause the rename function to fail are that the file is open
or that it is necessary to copy its contents to effectuate its renaming.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.19.4.3" href="#7.19.4.3">7.19.4.3 The tmpfile function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
FILE *tmpfile(void);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The tmpfile function creates a temporary binary file that is different from any other
existing file and that will automatically be removed when it is closed or at program
termination. If the program terminates abnormally, whether an open temporary file is
removed is implementation-defined. The file is opened for update with "wb+" mode.
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
It should be possible to open at least TMP_MAX temporary files during the lifetime of the
program (this limit may be shared with tmpnam) and there should be no limit on the
number simultaneously open other than this limit and any limit on the number of open
files (FOPEN_MAX).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The tmpfile function returns a pointer to the stream of the file that it created. If the file
cannot be created, the tmpfile function returns a null pointer.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the fopen function (<a href="#7.19.5.3">7.19.5.3</a>).
<h5><a name="7.19.4.4" href="#7.19.4.4">7.19.4.4 The tmpnam function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
char *tmpnam(char *s);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The tmpnam function generates a string that is a valid file name and that is not the same
as the name of an existing file.<sup><a href="#note236"><b>236)</b></a></sup> The function is potentially capable of generating
The tmpnam function generates a different string each time it is called.
<p><!--para 4 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the tmpnam function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
If no suitable string can be generated, the tmpnam function returns a null pointer.
Otherwise, if the argument is a null pointer, the tmpnam function leaves its result in an
function may modify the same object). If the argument is not a null pointer, it is assumed
to point to an array of at least L_tmpnam chars; the tmpnam function writes its result
in that array and returns the argument as its value.
-<h6>Environmental limits</h6>
+<p><b>Environmental limits</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
The value of the macro TMP_MAX shall be at least 25.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note236" href="#note236">236)</a> Files created using strings generated by the tmpnam function are temporary only in the sense that
their names should not collide with those generated by conventional naming rules for the
implementation. It is still necessary to use the remove function to remove such files when their use
<h4><a name="7.19.5" href="#7.19.5">7.19.5 File access functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.19.5.1" href="#7.19.5.1">7.19.5.1 The fclose function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fclose(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A successful call to the fclose function causes the stream pointed to by stream to be
flushed and the associated file to be closed. Any unwritten buffered data for the stream
are discarded. Whether or not the call succeeds, the stream is disassociated from the file
and any buffer set by the setbuf or setvbuf function is disassociated from the stream
(and deallocated if it was automatically allocated).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fclose function returns zero if the stream was successfully closed, or EOF if any
errors were detected.
<h5><a name="7.19.5.2" href="#7.19.5.2">7.19.5.2 The fflush function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<!--page 283 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fflush(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If stream points to an output stream or an update stream in which the most recent
operation was not input, the fflush function causes any unwritten data for that stream
<p><!--para 3 -->
If stream is a null pointer, the fflush function performs this flushing action on all
streams for which the behavior is defined above.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The fflush function sets the error indicator for the stream and returns EOF if a write
error occurs, otherwise it returns zero.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the fopen function (<a href="#7.19.5.3">7.19.5.3</a>).
<h5><a name="7.19.5.3" href="#7.19.5.3">7.19.5.3 The fopen function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
FILE *fopen(const char * restrict filename,
const char * restrict mode);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fopen function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename,
and associates a stream with it.
<p><!--para 7 -->
When opened, a stream is fully buffered if and only if it can be determined not to refer to
an interactive device. The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream are cleared.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
The fopen function returns a pointer to the object controlling the stream. If the open
operation fails, fopen returns a null pointer.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: file positioning functions (<a href="#7.19.9">7.19.9</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note237" href="#note237">237)</a> If the string begins with one of the above sequences, the implementation might choose to ignore the
remaining characters, or it might use them to select different kinds of a file (some of which might not
conform to the properties in <a href="#7.19.2">7.19.2</a>).
</small>
<h5><a name="7.19.5.4" href="#7.19.5.4">7.19.5.4 The freopen function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
const char * restrict mode,
FILE * restrict stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The freopen function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename
and associates the stream pointed to by stream with it. The mode argument is used just
The freopen function first attempts to close any file that is associated with the specified
stream. Failure to close the file is ignored. The error and end-of-file indicators for the
stream are cleared.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
The freopen function returns a null pointer if the open operation fails. Otherwise,
freopen returns the value of stream.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note238" href="#note238">238)</a> The primary use of the freopen function is to change the file associated with a standard text stream
(stderr, stdin, or stdout), as those identifiers need not be modifiable lvalues to which the value
returned by the fopen function may be assigned.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.19.5.5" href="#7.19.5.5">7.19.5.5 The setbuf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
void setbuf(FILE * restrict stream,
char * restrict buf);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
Except that it returns no value, the setbuf function is equivalent to the setvbuf
function invoked with the values _IOFBF for mode and BUFSIZ for size, or (if buf
is a null pointer), with the value _IONBF for mode.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The setbuf function returns no value.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the setvbuf function (<a href="#7.19.5.6">7.19.5.6</a>).
<h5><a name="7.19.5.6" href="#7.19.5.6">7.19.5.6 The setvbuf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
<!--page 286 -->
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The setvbuf function may be used only after the stream pointed to by stream has
been associated with an open file and before any other operation (other than an
specifies the size of the array; otherwise, size may determine the size of a buffer
allocated by the setvbuf function. The contents of the array at any time are
indeterminate.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The setvbuf function returns zero on success, or nonzero if an invalid value is given
for mode or if the request cannot be honored.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note239" href="#note239">239)</a> The buffer has to have a lifetime at least as great as the open stream, so the stream should be closed
before a buffer that has automatic storage duration is deallocated upon block exit.
</small>
The formatted input/output functions shall behave as if there is a sequence point after the
actions associated with each specifier.<sup><a href="#note240"><b>240)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note240" href="#note240">240)</a> The fprintf functions perform writes to memory for the %n specifier.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.19.6.1" href="#7.19.6.1">7.19.6.1 The fprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fprintf(FILE * restrict stream,
const char * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fprintf function writes output to the stream pointed to by stream, under control
of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are
<p><!--para 11 -->
For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value is correctly rounded
to a hexadecimal floating number with the given precision.
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 12 -->
For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not exactly
representable in the given precision, the result should be one of the two adjacent numbers
adjacent decimal strings L < U, both having DECIMAL_DIG significant digits; the value
of the resultant decimal string D should satisfy L <= D <= U, with the extra stipulation that
the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 14 -->
The fprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value
if an output or encoding error occurred.
-<h6>Environmental limits</h6>
+<p><b>Environmental limits</b>
<p><!--para 15 -->
The number of characters that can be produced by any single conversion shall be at least
4095.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: conversion state (<a href="#7.24.6">7.24.6</a>), the wcrtomb function (<a href="#7.24.6.3.3">7.24.6.3.3</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note241" href="#note241">241)</a> Note that 0 is taken as a flag, not as the beginning of a field width.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note242" href="#note242">242)</a> The results of all floating conversions of a negative zero, and of negative values that round to zero,
</small>
<h5><a name="7.19.6.2" href="#7.19.6.2">7.19.6.2 The fscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fscanf(FILE * restrict stream,
const char * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fscanf function reads input from the stream pointed to by stream, under control
of the string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how
Trailing white space (including new-line characters) is left unread unless matched by a
directive. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly
determinable other than via the %n directive.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 16 -->
The fscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the function returns the number of input items
(<a href="#7.24.6">7.24.6</a>), the wcrtomb function (<a href="#7.24.6.3.3">7.24.6.3.3</a>).
<!--page 302 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note250" href="#note250">250)</a> These white-space characters are not counted against a specified field width.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note251" href="#note251">251)</a> fscanf pushes back at most one input character onto the input stream. Therefore, some sequences
</small>
<h5><a name="7.19.6.3" href="#7.19.6.3">7.19.6.3 The printf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int printf(const char * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The printf function is equivalent to fprintf with the argument stdout interposed
before the arguments to printf.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The printf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if
an output or encoding error occurred.
<h5><a name="7.19.6.4" href="#7.19.6.4">7.19.6.4 The scanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int scanf(const char * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The scanf function is equivalent to fscanf with the argument stdin interposed
before the arguments to scanf.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The scanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before
any conversion. Otherwise, the scanf function returns the number of input items
matching failure.
<h5><a name="7.19.6.5" href="#7.19.6.5">7.19.6.5 The snprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int snprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n,
const char * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The snprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, except that the output is written into
an array (specified by argument s) rather than to a stream. If n is zero, nothing is written,
of the characters actually written into the array. If copying takes place between objects
that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
<!--page 303 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The snprintf function returns the number of characters that would have been written
had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative
completely written if and only if the returned value is nonnegative and less than n.
<h5><a name="7.19.6.6" href="#7.19.6.6">7.19.6.6 The sprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int sprintf(char * restrict s,
const char * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The sprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, except that the output is written into
an array (specified by the argument s) rather than to a stream. A null character is written
at the end of the characters written; it is not counted as part of the returned value. If
copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The sprintf function returns the number of characters written in the array, not
counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred.
<h5><a name="7.19.6.7" href="#7.19.6.7">7.19.6.7 The sscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int sscanf(const char * restrict s,
const char * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The sscanf function is equivalent to fscanf, except that input is obtained from a
string (specified by the argument s) rather than from a stream. Reaching the end of the
string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fscanf function. If copying
takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The sscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the sscanf function returns the number of input
<!--page 304 -->
<h5><a name="7.19.6.8" href="#7.19.6.8">7.19.6.8 The vfprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vfprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfprintf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note254"><b>254)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vfprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative
value if an output or encoding error occurred.
<!--page 305 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note254" href="#note254">254)</a> As the functions vfprintf, vfscanf, vprintf, vscanf, vsnprintf, vsprintf, and
vsscanf invoke the va_arg macro, the value of arg after the return is indeterminate.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.19.6.9" href="#7.19.6.9">7.19.6.9 The vfscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vfscanf function is equivalent to fscanf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfscanf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note254"><b>254)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vfscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the vfscanf function returns the number of input
early matching failure.
<h5><a name="7.19.6.10" href="#7.19.6.10">7.19.6.10 The vprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
int vprintf(const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vprintf function is equivalent to printf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vprintf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note254"><b>254)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value
if an output or encoding error occurred.
<!--page 306 -->
<h5><a name="7.19.6.11" href="#7.19.6.11">7.19.6.11 The vscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
int vscanf(const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vscanf function is equivalent to scanf, with the variable argument list replaced
by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly
subsequent va_arg calls). The vscanf function does not invoke the va_end
macro.<sup><a href="#note254"><b>254)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the vscanf function returns the number of input
early matching failure.
<h5><a name="7.19.6.12" href="#7.19.6.12">7.19.6.12 The vsnprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vsnprintf function is equivalent to snprintf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsnprintf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note254"><b>254)</b></a></sup> If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vsnprintf function returns the number of characters that would have been written
had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative
<!--page 307 -->
<h5><a name="7.19.6.13" href="#7.19.6.13">7.19.6.13 The vsprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vsprintf function is equivalent to sprintf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsprintf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note254"><b>254)</b></a></sup> If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vsprintf function returns the number of characters written in the array, not
counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred.
<h5><a name="7.19.6.14" href="#7.19.6.14">7.19.6.14 The vsscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vsscanf function is equivalent to sscanf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsscanf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note254"><b>254)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vsscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the vsscanf function returns the number of input
<h4><a name="7.19.7" href="#7.19.7">7.19.7 Character input/output functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.19.7.1" href="#7.19.7.1">7.19.7.1 The fgetc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fgetc(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by stream is not set and a
next character is present, the fgetc function obtains that character as an unsigned
char converted to an int and advances the associated file position indicator for the
stream (if defined).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is at end-of-file, the end-
of-file indicator for the stream is set and the fgetc function returns EOF. Otherwise, the
If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and the fgetc function
returns EOF.<sup><a href="#note255"><b>255)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note255" href="#note255">255)</a> An end-of-file and a read error can be distinguished by use of the feof and ferror functions.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.19.7.2" href="#7.19.7.2">7.19.7.2 The fgets function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
char *fgets(char * restrict s, int n,
FILE * restrict stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fgets function reads at most one less than the number of characters specified by n
from the stream pointed to by stream into the array pointed to by s. No additional
characters are read after a new-line character (which is retained) or after end-of-file. A
null character is written immediately after the last character read into the array.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fgets function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no
characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a
<!--page 309 -->
<h5><a name="7.19.7.3" href="#7.19.7.3">7.19.7.3 The fputc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fputc(int c, FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fputc function writes the character specified by c (converted to an unsigned
char) to the output stream pointed to by stream, at the position indicated by the
associated file position indicator for the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator
appropriately. If the file cannot support positioning requests, or if the stream was opened
with append mode, the character is appended to the output stream.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fputc function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
indicator for the stream is set and fputc returns EOF.
<h5><a name="7.19.7.4" href="#7.19.7.4">7.19.7.4 The fputs function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fputs(const char * restrict s,
FILE * restrict stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fputs function writes the string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by
stream. The terminating null character is not written.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fputs function returns EOF if a write error occurs; otherwise it returns a
nonnegative value.
<h5><a name="7.19.7.5" href="#7.19.7.5">7.19.7.5 The getc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int getc(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The getc function is equivalent to fgetc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it
may evaluate stream more than once, so the argument should never be an expression
with side effects.
<!--page 310 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The getc function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by
stream. If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and
getc returns EOF.
<h5><a name="7.19.7.6" href="#7.19.7.6">7.19.7.6 The getchar function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int getchar(void);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The getchar function is equivalent to getc with the argument stdin.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The getchar function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by
stdin. If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and
getchar returns EOF.
<h5><a name="7.19.7.7" href="#7.19.7.7">7.19.7.7 The gets function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
char *gets(char *s);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The gets function reads characters from the input stream pointed to by stdin, into the
array pointed to by s, until end-of-file is encountered or a new-line character is read.
Any new-line character is discarded, and a null character is written immediately after the
last character read into the array.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The gets function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no
characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a
<!--page 311 -->
<h5><a name="7.19.7.8" href="#7.19.7.8">7.19.7.8 The putc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int putc(int c, FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The putc function is equivalent to fputc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it
may evaluate stream more than once, so that argument should never be an expression
with side effects.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The putc function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
indicator for the stream is set and putc returns EOF.
<h5><a name="7.19.7.9" href="#7.19.7.9">7.19.7.9 The putchar function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int putchar(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The putchar function is equivalent to putc with the second argument stdout.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The putchar function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error
indicator for the stream is set and putchar returns EOF.
<h5><a name="7.19.7.10" href="#7.19.7.10">7.19.7.10 The puts function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int puts(const char *s);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The puts function writes the string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by stdout,
and appends a new-line character to the output. The terminating null character is not
written.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The puts function returns EOF if a write error occurs; otherwise it returns a nonnegative
value.
<!--page 312 -->
<h5><a name="7.19.7.11" href="#7.19.7.11">7.19.7.11 The ungetc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ungetc function pushes the character specified by c (converted to an unsigned
char) back onto the input stream pointed to by stream. Pushed-back characters will be
For a binary stream, its file position indicator is decremented by each successful call to
the ungetc function; if its value was zero before a call, it is indeterminate after the
call.<sup><a href="#note256"><b>256)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
The ungetc function returns the character pushed back after conversion, or EOF if the
operation fails.
<!--page 313 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note256" href="#note256">256)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.9">7.26.9</a>).
</small>
<h4><a name="7.19.8" href="#7.19.8">7.19.8 Direct input/output functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.19.8.1" href="#7.19.8.1">7.19.8.1 The fread function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
size_t size, size_t nmemb,
FILE * restrict stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fread function reads, into the array pointed to by ptr, up to nmemb elements
whose size is specified by size, from the stream pointed to by stream. For each
indicator for the stream (if defined) is advanced by the number of characters successfully
read. If an error occurs, the resulting value of the file position indicator for the stream is
indeterminate. If a partial element is read, its value is indeterminate.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fread function returns the number of elements successfully read, which may be
less than nmemb if a read error or end-of-file is encountered. If size or nmemb is zero,
unchanged.
<h5><a name="7.19.8.2" href="#7.19.8.2">7.19.8.2 The fwrite function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
size_t size, size_t nmemb,
FILE * restrict stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fwrite function writes, from the array pointed to by ptr, up to nmemb elements
whose size is specified by size, to the stream pointed to by stream. For each object,
error occurs, the resulting value of the file position indicator for the stream is
indeterminate.
<!--page 314 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fwrite function returns the number of elements successfully written, which will be
less than nmemb only if a write error is encountered. If size or nmemb is zero,
<h4><a name="7.19.9" href="#7.19.9">7.19.9 File positioning functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.19.9.1" href="#7.19.9.1">7.19.9.1 The fgetpos function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fgetpos(FILE * restrict stream,
fpos_t * restrict pos);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fgetpos function stores the current values of the parse state (if any) and file
position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream in the object pointed to by pos.
The values stored contain unspecified information usable by the fsetpos function for
repositioning the stream to its position at the time of the call to the fgetpos function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If successful, the fgetpos function returns zero; on failure, the fgetpos function
returns nonzero and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the fsetpos function (<a href="#7.19.9.3">7.19.9.3</a>).
<h5><a name="7.19.9.2" href="#7.19.9.2">7.19.9.2 The fseek function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fseek(FILE *stream, long int offset, int whence);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fseek function sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
If a read or write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and fseek fails.
effects of the ungetc function on the stream, clears the end-of-file indicator for the
stream, and then establishes the new position. After a successful fseek call, the next
operation on an update stream may be either input or output.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
The fseek function returns nonzero only for a request that cannot be satisfied.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the ftell function (<a href="#7.19.9.4">7.19.9.4</a>).
<h5><a name="7.19.9.3" href="#7.19.9.3">7.19.9.3 The fsetpos function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fsetpos(FILE *stream, const fpos_t *pos);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fsetpos function sets the mbstate_t object (if any) and file position indicator
for the stream pointed to by stream according to the value of the object pointed to by
on the stream, clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream, and then establishes the new
parse state and position. After a successful fsetpos call, the next operation on an
update stream may be either input or output.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If successful, the fsetpos function returns zero; on failure, the fsetpos function
returns nonzero and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.
<h5><a name="7.19.9.4" href="#7.19.9.4">7.19.9.4 The ftell function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
long int ftell(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ftell function obtains the current value of the file position indicator for the stream
pointed to by stream. For a binary stream, the value is the number of characters from
return values is not necessarily a meaningful measure of the number of characters written
<!--page 316 -->
or read.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If successful, the ftell function returns the current value of the file position indicator
for the stream. On failure, the ftell function returns -1L and stores an
implementation-defined positive value in errno.
<h5><a name="7.19.9.5" href="#7.19.9.5">7.19.9.5 The rewind function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
void rewind(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The rewind function sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by
stream to the beginning of the file. It is equivalent to
(void)fseek(stream, 0L, SEEK_SET)
</pre>
except that the error indicator for the stream is also cleared.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The rewind function returns no value.
<h4><a name="7.19.10" href="#7.19.10">7.19.10 Error-handling functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.19.10.1" href="#7.19.10.1">7.19.10.1 The clearerr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
void clearerr(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The clearerr function clears the end-of-file and error indicators for the stream pointed
to by stream.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The clearerr function returns no value.
<!--page 317 -->
<h5><a name="7.19.10.2" href="#7.19.10.2">7.19.10.2 The feof function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int feof(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The feof function tests the end-of-file indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The feof function returns nonzero if and only if the end-of-file indicator is set for
stream.
<h5><a name="7.19.10.3" href="#7.19.10.3">7.19.10.3 The ferror function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int ferror(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ferror function tests the error indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ferror function returns nonzero if and only if the error indicator is set for
stream.
<h5><a name="7.19.10.4" href="#7.19.10.4">7.19.10.4 The perror function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
void perror(const char *s);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The perror function maps the error number in the integer expression errno to an
error message. It writes a sequence of characters to the standard error stream thus: first
string pointed to by s followed by a colon (:) and a space; then an appropriate error
message string followed by a new-line character. The contents of the error message
strings are the same as those returned by the strerror function with argument errno.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The perror function returns no value.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the strerror function (<a href="#7.21.6.2">7.21.6.2</a>).
<!--page 319 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note257" href="#note257">257)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.10">7.26.10</a>).
</small>
behavior is undefined.
<h5><a name="7.20.1.1" href="#7.20.1.1">7.20.1.1 The atof function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
double atof(const char *nptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The atof function converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to
double representation. Except for the behavior on error, it is equivalent to
<pre>
strtod(nptr, (char **)NULL)
</pre>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The atof function returns the converted value.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (<a href="#7.20.1.3">7.20.1.3</a>).
<h5><a name="7.20.1.2" href="#7.20.1.2">7.20.1.2 The atoi, atol, and atoll functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
long int atol(const char *nptr);
long long int atoll(const char *nptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The atoi, atol, and atoll functions convert the initial portion of the string pointed
to by nptr to int, long int, and long long int representation, respectively.
atol: strtol(nptr, (char **)NULL, 10)
atoll: strtoll(nptr, (char **)NULL, 10)
</pre>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The atoi, atol, and atoll functions return the converted value.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions
<!--page 320 -->
<h5><a name="7.20.1.3" href="#7.20.1.3">7.20.1.3 The strtod, strtof, and strtold functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
long double strtold(const char * restrict nptr,
char ** restrict endptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strtod, strtof, and strtold functions convert the initial portion of the string
pointed to by nptr to double, float, and long double representation,
If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
that endptr is not a null pointer.
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form, FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, and
the result is not exactly representable, the result should be one of the two numbers in the
<!--page 322 -->
stipulation that the error with respect to D should have a correct sign for the current
rounding direction.<sup><a href="#note260"><b>260)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 10 -->
The functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed,
zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable values, plus or
than the smallest normalized positive number in the return type; whether errno acquires
the value ERANGE is implementation-defined.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note258" href="#note258">258)</a> It is unspecified whether a minus-signed sequence is converted to a negative number directly or by
negating the value resulting from converting the corresponding unsigned sequence (see <a href="#F.5">F.5</a>); the two
methods may yield different results if rounding is toward positive or negative infinity. In either case,
</small>
<h5><a name="7.20.1.4" href="#7.20.1.4">7.20.1.4 The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
char ** restrict endptr,
int base);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions convert the initial
portion of the string pointed to by nptr to long int, long long int, unsigned
If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
that endptr is not a null pointer.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions return the converted
value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value
<h4><a name="7.20.2" href="#7.20.2">7.20.2 Pseudo-random sequence generation functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.20.2.1" href="#7.20.2.1">7.20.2.1 The rand function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
int rand(void);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The rand function computes a sequence of pseudo-random integers in the range 0 to
RAND_MAX.
<p><!--para 3 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the rand function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The rand function returns a pseudo-random integer.
-<h6>Environmental limits</h6>
+<p><b>Environmental limits</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
The value of the RAND_MAX macro shall be at least 32767.
<h5><a name="7.20.2.2" href="#7.20.2.2">7.20.2.2 The srand function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void srand(unsigned int seed);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The srand function uses the argument as a seed for a new sequence of pseudo-random
numbers to be returned by subsequent calls to rand. If srand is then called with the
as when srand is first called with a seed value of 1.
<p><!--para 3 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the srand function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The srand function returns no value.
<p><!--para 5 -->
nonzero value, except that the returned pointer shall not be used to access an object.
<h5><a name="7.20.3.1" href="#7.20.3.1">7.20.3.1 The calloc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void *calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The calloc function allocates space for an array of nmemb objects, each of whose size
is size. The space is initialized to all bits zero.<sup><a href="#note261"><b>261)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The calloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated space.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note261" href="#note261">261)</a> Note that this need not be the same as the representation of floating-point zero or a null pointer
constant.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.20.3.2" href="#7.20.3.2">7.20.3.2 The free function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void free(void *ptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The free function causes the space pointed to by ptr to be deallocated, that is, made
available for further allocation. If ptr is a null pointer, no action occurs. Otherwise, if
<!--page 326 -->
realloc function, or if the space has been deallocated by a call to free or realloc,
the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The free function returns no value.
<h5><a name="7.20.3.3" href="#7.20.3.3">7.20.3.3 The malloc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void *malloc(size_t size);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The malloc function allocates space for an object whose size is specified by size and
whose value is indeterminate.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The malloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated space.
<h5><a name="7.20.3.4" href="#7.20.3.4">7.20.3.4 The realloc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void *realloc(void *ptr, size_t size);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The realloc function deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a
pointer to a new object that has the size specified by size. The contents of the new
calloc, malloc, or realloc function, or if the space has been deallocated by a call
to the free or realloc function, the behavior is undefined. If memory for the new
object cannot be allocated, the old object is not deallocated and its value is unchanged.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The realloc function returns a pointer to the new object (which may have the same
value as a pointer to the old object), or a null pointer if the new object could not be
<h4><a name="7.20.4" href="#7.20.4">7.20.4 Communication with the environment</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.20.4.1" href="#7.20.4.1">7.20.4.1 The abort function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void abort(void);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The abort function causes abnormal program termination to occur, unless the signal
SIGABRT is being caught and the signal handler does not return. Whether open streams
removed is implementation-defined. An implementation-defined form of the status
unsuccessful termination is returned to the host environment by means of the function
call raise(SIGABRT).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The abort function does not return to its caller.
<h5><a name="7.20.4.2" href="#7.20.4.2">7.20.4.2 The atexit function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
int atexit(void (*func)(void));
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The atexit function registers the function pointed to by func, to be called without
arguments at normal program termination.
-<h6>Environmental limits</h6>
+<p><b>Environmental limits</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The implementation shall support the registration of at least 32 functions.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The atexit function returns zero if the registration succeeds, nonzero if it fails.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the exit function (<a href="#7.20.4.3">7.20.4.3</a>).
<h5><a name="7.20.4.3" href="#7.20.4.3">7.20.4.3 The exit function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void exit(int status);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The exit function causes normal program termination to occur. If more than one call to
the exit function is executed by a program, the behavior is undefined.
returned. If the value of status is EXIT_FAILURE, an implementation-defined form
of the status unsuccessful termination is returned. Otherwise the status returned is
implementation-defined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
The exit function cannot return to its caller.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note262" href="#note262">262)</a> Each function is called as many times as it was registered, and in the correct order with respect to
other registered functions.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.20.4.4" href="#7.20.4.4">7.20.4.4 The _Exit function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void _Exit(int status);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The _Exit function causes normal program termination to occur and control to be
returned to the host environment. No functions registered by the atexit function or
host environment is determined in the same way as for the exit function (<a href="#7.20.4.3">7.20.4.3</a>).
Whether open streams with unwritten buffered data are flushed, open streams are closed,
or temporary files are removed is implementation-defined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The _Exit function cannot return to its caller.
<!--page 329 -->
<h5><a name="7.20.4.5" href="#7.20.4.5">7.20.4.5 The getenv function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
char *getenv(const char *name);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The getenv function searches an environment list, provided by the host environment,
for a string that matches the string pointed to by name. The set of environment names
and the method for altering the environment list are implementation-defined.
<p><!--para 3 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the getenv function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The getenv function returns a pointer to a string associated with the matched list
member. The string pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be
be found, a null pointer is returned.
<h5><a name="7.20.4.6" href="#7.20.4.6">7.20.4.6 The system function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
int system(const char *string);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If string is a null pointer, the system function determines whether the host
environment has a command processor. If string is not a null pointer, the system
function passes the string pointed to by string to that command processor to be
executed in a manner which the implementation shall document; this might then cause the
program calling system to behave in a non-conforming manner or to terminate.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the argument is a null pointer, the system function returns nonzero only if a
command processor is available. If the argument is not a null pointer, and the system
comparison function, and also between any call to the comparison function and any
movement of the objects passed as arguments to that call.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note263" href="#note263">263)</a> That is, if the value passed is p, then the following expressions are always nonzero:
<pre>
</small>
<h5><a name="7.20.5.1" href="#7.20.5.1">7.20.5.1 The bsearch function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
size_t nmemb, size_t size,
int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The bsearch function searches an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which
is pointed to by base, for an element that matches the object pointed to by key. The
respectively, to be less than, to match, or to be greater than the array element. The array
shall consist of: all the elements that compare less than, all the elements that compare
equal to, and all the elements that compare greater than the key object, in that order.<sup><a href="#note264"><b>264)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The bsearch function returns a pointer to a matching element of the array, or a null
pointer if no match is found. If two elements compare as equal, which element is
matched is unspecified.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note264" href="#note264">264)</a> In practice, the entire array is sorted according to the comparison function.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.20.5.2" href="#7.20.5.2">7.20.5.2 The qsort function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
void qsort(void *base, size_t nmemb, size_t size,
int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The qsort function sorts an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which is
pointed to by base. The size of each object is specified by size.
or greater than the second.
<p><!--para 4 -->
If two elements compare as equal, their order in the resulting sorted array is unspecified.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 5 -->
The qsort function returns no value.
<h4><a name="7.20.6" href="#7.20.6">7.20.6 Integer arithmetic functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.20.6.1" href="#7.20.6.1">7.20.6.1 The abs, labs and llabs functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
long int labs(long int j);
long long int llabs(long long int j);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The abs, labs, and llabs functions compute the absolute value of an integer j. If the
result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.<sup><a href="#note265"><b>265)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The abs, labs, and llabs, functions return the absolute value.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note265" href="#note265">265)</a> The absolute value of the most negative number cannot be represented in two's complement.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.20.6.2" href="#7.20.6.2">7.20.6.2 The div, ldiv, and lldiv functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
ldiv_t ldiv(long int numer, long int denom);
lldiv_t lldiv(long long int numer, long long int denom);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The div, ldiv, and lldiv, functions compute numer / denom and numer %
denom in a single operation.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The div, ldiv, and lldiv functions return a structure of type div_t, ldiv_t, and
lldiv_t, respectively, comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structures
otherwise.<sup><a href="#note266"><b>266)</b></a></sup> Changing the LC_CTYPE category causes the conversion state of these
functions to be indeterminate.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note266" href="#note266">266)</a> If the locale employs special bytes to change the shift state, these bytes do not produce separate wide
character codes, but are grouped with an adjacent multibyte character.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.20.7.1" href="#7.20.7.1">7.20.7.1 The mblen function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
int mblen(const char *s, size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If s is not a null pointer, the mblen function determines the number of bytes contained
in the multibyte character pointed to by s. Except that the conversion state of the
</pre>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the mblen function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If s is a null pointer, the mblen function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
<!--page 334 -->
<h5><a name="7.20.7.2" href="#7.20.7.2">7.20.7.2 The mbtowc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
const char * restrict s,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If s is not a null pointer, the mbtowc function inspects at most n bytes beginning with
the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next
character, the function is left in the initial conversion state.
<p><!--para 3 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the mbtowc function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If s is a null pointer, the mbtowc function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
macro.
<h5><a name="7.20.7.3" href="#7.20.7.3">7.20.7.3 The wctomb function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
int wctomb(char *s, wchar_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wctomb function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte
character corresponding to the wide character given by wc (including any shift
<!--page 335 -->
<p><!--para 3 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the wctomb function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If s is a null pointer, the wctomb function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte
character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is
the current locale.
<h5><a name="7.20.8.1" href="#7.20.8.1">7.20.8.1 The mbstowcs function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
const char * restrict s,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The mbstowcs function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the
initial shift state from the array pointed to by s into a sequence of corresponding wide
<p><!--para 3 -->
No more than n elements will be modified in the array pointed to by pwcs. If copying
takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If an invalid multibyte character is encountered, the mbstowcs function returns
(size_t)(-1). Otherwise, the mbstowcs function returns the number of array
<!--page 336 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note267" href="#note267">267)</a> The array will not be null-terminated if the value returned is n.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.20.8.2" href="#7.20.8.2">7.20.8.2 The wcstombs function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.20"><stdlib.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict pwcs,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcstombs function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array pointed
to by pwcs into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that begins in the
<p><!--para 3 -->
No more than n bytes will be modified in the array pointed to by s. If copying takes place
between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If a wide character is encountered that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character,
the wcstombs function returns (size_t)(-1). Otherwise, the wcstombs function
unsigned char (and therefore every possible object representation is valid and has a
different value).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note268" href="#note268">268)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.11">7.26.11</a>).
</small>
<h4><a name="7.21.2" href="#7.21.2">7.21.2 Copying functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.21.2.1" href="#7.21.2.1">7.21.2.1 The memcpy function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
const void * restrict s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The memcpy function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the
object pointed to by s1. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior
is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The memcpy function returns the value of s1.
<!--page 338 -->
<h5><a name="7.21.2.2" href="#7.21.2.2">7.21.2.2 The memmove function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
void *memmove(void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The memmove function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the
object pointed to by s1. Copying takes place as if the n characters from the object
pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n characters that does not
overlap the objects pointed to by s1 and s2, and then the n characters from the
temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The memmove function returns the value of s1.
<h5><a name="7.21.2.3" href="#7.21.2.3">7.21.2.3 The strcpy function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
char *strcpy(char * restrict s1,
const char * restrict s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strcpy function copies the string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null
character) into the array pointed to by s1. If copying takes place between objects that
overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strcpy function returns the value of s1.
<h5><a name="7.21.2.4" href="#7.21.2.4">7.21.2.4 The strncpy function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
const char * restrict s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strncpy function copies not more than n characters (characters that follow a null
character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by
If the array pointed to by s2 is a string that is shorter than n characters, null characters
are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1, until n characters in all have been
written.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The strncpy function returns the value of s1.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note269" href="#note269">269)</a> Thus, if there is no null character in the first n characters of the array pointed to by s2, the result will
not be null-terminated.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.21.3" href="#7.21.3">7.21.3 Concatenation functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.21.3.1" href="#7.21.3.1">7.21.3.1 The strcat function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
char *strcat(char * restrict s1,
const char * restrict s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strcat function appends a copy of the string pointed to by s2 (including the
terminating null character) to the end of the string pointed to by s1. The initial character
of s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1. If copying takes place between
objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strcat function returns the value of s1.
<h5><a name="7.21.3.2" href="#7.21.3.2">7.21.3.2 The strncat function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
const char * restrict s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strncat function appends not more than n characters (a null character and
characters that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of
<!--page 340 -->
takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strncat function returns the value of s1.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the strlen function (<a href="#7.21.6.3">7.21.6.3</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note270" href="#note270">270)</a> Thus, the maximum number of characters that can end up in the array pointed to by s1 is
strlen(s1)+n+1.
</small>
compared.
<h5><a name="7.21.4.1" href="#7.21.4.1">7.21.4.1 The memcmp function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The memcmp function compares the first n characters of the object pointed to by s1 to
the first n characters of the object pointed to by s2.<sup><a href="#note271"><b>271)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The memcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
accordingly as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the object
pointed to by s2.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note271" href="#note271">271)</a> The contents of ''holes'' used as padding for purposes of alignment within structure objects are
indeterminate. Strings shorter than their allocated space and unions may also cause problems in
comparison.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.21.4.2" href="#7.21.4.2">7.21.4.2 The strcmp function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
int strcmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strcmp function compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by
s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
accordingly as the string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string
pointed to by s2.
<h5><a name="7.21.4.3" href="#7.21.4.3">7.21.4.3 The strcoll function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
int strcoll(const char *s1, const char *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strcoll function compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by
s2, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the current locale.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strcoll function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
accordingly as the string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string
pointed to by s2 when both are interpreted as appropriate to the current locale.
<h5><a name="7.21.4.4" href="#7.21.4.4">7.21.4.4 The strncmp function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
int strncmp(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strncmp function compares not more than n characters (characters that follow a
null character are not compared) from the array pointed to by s1 to the array pointed to
by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strncmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
accordingly as the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal
to, or less than the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s2.
<h5><a name="7.21.4.5" href="#7.21.4.5">7.21.4.5 The strxfrm function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
const char * restrict s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strxfrm function transforms the string pointed to by s2 and places the resulting
string into the array pointed to by s1. The transformation is such that if the strcmp
pointed to by s1, including the terminating null character. If n is zero, s1 is permitted to
be a null pointer. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
undefined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strxfrm function returns the length of the transformed string (not including the
terminating null character). If the value returned is n or more, the contents of the array
<h4><a name="7.21.5" href="#7.21.5">7.21.5 Search functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.21.5.1" href="#7.21.5.1">7.21.5.1 The memchr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
void *memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The memchr function locates the first occurrence of c (converted to an unsigned
char) in the initial n characters (each interpreted as unsigned char) of the object
pointed to by s.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The memchr function returns a pointer to the located character, or a null pointer if the
character does not occur in the object.
<h5><a name="7.21.5.2" href="#7.21.5.2">7.21.5.2 The strchr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
char *strchr(const char *s, int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strchr function locates the first occurrence of c (converted to a char) in the
string pointed to by s. The terminating null character is considered to be part of the
string.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strchr function returns a pointer to the located character, or a null pointer if the
character does not occur in the string.
<!--page 343 -->
<h5><a name="7.21.5.3" href="#7.21.5.3">7.21.5.3 The strcspn function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
size_t strcspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strcspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string
pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters not from the string pointed to by
s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strcspn function returns the length of the segment.
<h5><a name="7.21.5.4" href="#7.21.5.4">7.21.5.4 The strpbrk function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
char *strpbrk(const char *s1, const char *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strpbrk function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of any
character from the string pointed to by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strpbrk function returns a pointer to the character, or a null pointer if no character
from s2 occurs in s1.
<h5><a name="7.21.5.5" href="#7.21.5.5">7.21.5.5 The strrchr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
char *strrchr(const char *s, int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strrchr function locates the last occurrence of c (converted to a char) in the
string pointed to by s. The terminating null character is considered to be part of the
string.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strrchr function returns a pointer to the character, or a null pointer if c does not
occur in the string.
<!--page 344 -->
<h5><a name="7.21.5.6" href="#7.21.5.6">7.21.5.6 The strspn function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
size_t strspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string
pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters from the string pointed to by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strspn function returns the length of the segment.
<h5><a name="7.21.5.7" href="#7.21.5.7">7.21.5.7 The strstr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
char *strstr(const char *s1, const char *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strstr function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of the
sequence of characters (excluding the terminating null character) in the string pointed to
by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strstr function returns a pointer to the located string, or a null pointer if the string
is not found. If s2 points to a string with zero length, the function returns s1.
<h5><a name="7.21.5.8" href="#7.21.5.8">7.21.5.8 The strtok function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
char *strtok(char * restrict s1,
const char * restrict s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A sequence of calls to the strtok function breaks the string pointed to by s1 into a
sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a character from the string pointed to
searching from the saved pointer and behaves as described above.
<p><!--para 6 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the strtok function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 7 -->
The strtok function returns a pointer to the first character of a token, or a null pointer
if there is no token.
<h4><a name="7.21.6" href="#7.21.6">7.21.6 Miscellaneous functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.21.6.1" href="#7.21.6.1">7.21.6.1 The memset function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
void *memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The memset function copies the value of c (converted to an unsigned char) into
each of the first n characters of the object pointed to by s.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The memset function returns the value of s.
<!--page 346 -->
<h5><a name="7.21.6.2" href="#7.21.6.2">7.21.6.2 The strerror function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
char *strerror(int errnum);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strerror function maps the number in errnum to a message string. Typically,
the values for errnum come from errno, but strerror shall map any value of type
int to a message.
<p><!--para 3 -->
The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the strerror function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The strerror function returns a pointer to the string, the contents of which are locale-
specific. The array pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be
overwritten by a subsequent call to the strerror function.
<h5><a name="7.21.6.3" href="#7.21.6.3">7.21.6.3 The strlen function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.21"><string.h></a>
size_t strlen(const char *s);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strlen function computes the length of the string pointed to by s.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strlen function returns the number of characters that precede the terminating null
character.
cproj(ldc) cprojl(ldc)
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note272" href="#note272">272)</a> Like other function-like macros in Standard libraries, each type-generic macro can be suppressed to
make available the corresponding ordinary function.
</small>
The value of tm_isdst is positive if Daylight Saving Time is in effect, zero if Daylight
Saving Time is not in effect, and negative if the information is not available.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note274" href="#note274">274)</a> The range [0, 60] for tm_sec allows for a positive leap second.
</small>
<h4><a name="7.23.2" href="#7.23.2">7.23.2 Time manipulation functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.23.2.1" href="#7.23.2.1">7.23.2.1 The clock function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
clock_t clock(void);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The clock function determines the processor time used.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The clock function returns the implementation's best approximation to the processor
time used by the program since the beginning of an implementation-defined era related
the processor time used is not available or its value cannot be represented, the function
returns the value (clock_t)(-1).<sup><a href="#note275"><b>275)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note275" href="#note275">275)</a> In order to measure the time spent in a program, the clock function should be called at the start of
the program and its return value subtracted from the value returned by subsequent calls.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.23.2.2" href="#7.23.2.2">7.23.2.2 The difftime function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
double difftime(time_t time1, time_t time0);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The difftime function computes the difference between two calendar times: time1 -
time0.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The difftime function returns the difference expressed in seconds as a double.
<!--page 352 -->
<h5><a name="7.23.2.3" href="#7.23.2.3">7.23.2.3 The mktime function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
time_t mktime(struct tm *timeptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The mktime function converts the broken-down time, expressed as local time, in the
structure pointed to by timeptr into a calendar time value with the same encoding as
set appropriately, and the other components are set to represent the specified calendar
time, but with their values forced to the ranges indicated above; the final value of
tm_mday is not set until tm_mon and tm_year are determined.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The mktime function returns the specified calendar time encoded as a value of type
time_t. If the calendar time cannot be represented, the function returns the value
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note276" href="#note276">276)</a> Thus, a positive or zero value for tm_isdst causes the mktime function to presume initially that
Daylight Saving Time, respectively, is or is not in effect for the specified time. A negative value
causes it to attempt to determine whether Daylight Saving Time is in effect for the specified time.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.23.2.4" href="#7.23.2.4">7.23.2.4 The time function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
time_t time(time_t *timer);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The time function determines the current calendar time. The encoding of the value is
unspecified.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The time function returns the implementation's best approximation to the current
calendar time. The value (time_t)(-1) is returned if the calendar time is not
functions call these functions.
<h5><a name="7.23.3.1" href="#7.23.3.1">7.23.3.1 The asctime function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The asctime function converts the broken-down time in the structure pointed to by
timeptr into a string in the form
return result;
}
</pre>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The asctime function returns a pointer to the string.
<h5><a name="7.23.3.2" href="#7.23.3.2">7.23.3.2 The ctime function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
char *ctime(const time_t *timer);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ctime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer to local time in the
form of a string. It is equivalent to
<pre>
asctime(localtime(timer))
</pre>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The ctime function returns the pointer returned by the asctime function with that
broken-down time as argument.
<!--page 355 -->
<h5><a name="7.23.3.3" href="#7.23.3.3">7.23.3.3 The gmtime function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *timer);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The gmtime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a broken-
down time, expressed as UTC.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The gmtime function returns a pointer to the broken-down time, or a null pointer if the
specified time cannot be converted to UTC.
<h5><a name="7.23.3.4" href="#7.23.3.4">7.23.3.4 The localtime function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
struct tm *localtime(const time_t *timer);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The localtime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a
broken-down time, expressed as local time.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The localtime function returns a pointer to the broken-down time, or a null pointer if
the specified time cannot be converted to local time.
<h5><a name="7.23.3.5" href="#7.23.3.5">7.23.3.5 The strftime function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
const char * restrict format,
const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The strftime function places characters into the array pointed to by s as controlled by
the string pointed to by format. The format shall be a multibyte character sequence,
<dt> %Z <dd> implementation-defined.
</dl>
<!--page 359 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
If the total number of resulting characters including the terminating null character is not
more than maxsize, the strftime function returns the number of characters placed
subclause causes copying to take place between objects that overlap, the behavior is
undefined.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note277" href="#note277">277)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.12">7.26.12</a>).
</small>
<p><small><a name="note278" href="#note278">278)</a> wchar_t and wint_t can be the same integer type.
The formatted wide character input/output functions shall behave as if there is a sequence
point after the actions associated with each specifier.<sup><a href="#note280"><b>280)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note280" href="#note280">280)</a> The fwprintf functions perform writes to memory for the %n specifier.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.2.1" href="#7.24.2.1">7.24.2.1 The fwprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fwprintf(FILE * restrict stream,
const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fwprintf function writes output to the stream pointed to by stream, under
control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments
<p><!--para 11 -->
For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value is correctly rounded
to a hexadecimal floating number with the given precision.
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 12 -->
For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not exactly
representable in the given precision, the result should be one of the two adjacent numbers
adjacent decimal strings L < U, both having DECIMAL_DIG significant digits; the value
of the resultant decimal string D should satisfy L <= D <= U, with the extra stipulation that
the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 14 -->
The fwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
value if an output or encoding error occurred.
<!--page 368 -->
-<h6>Environmental limits</h6>
+<p><b>Environmental limits</b>
<p><!--para 15 -->
The number of wide characters that can be produced by any single conversion shall be at
least 4095.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the btowc function (<a href="#7.24.6.1.1">7.24.6.1.1</a>), the mbrtowc function
(<a href="#7.24.6.3.2">7.24.6.3.2</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note281" href="#note281">281)</a> Note that 0 is taken as a flag, not as the beginning of a field width.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note282" href="#note282">282)</a> The results of all floating conversions of a negative zero, and of negative values that round to zero,
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.2.2" href="#7.24.2.2">7.24.2.2 The fwscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fwscanf(FILE * restrict stream,
const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fwscanf function reads input from the stream pointed to by stream, under
control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input
Trailing white space (including new-line wide characters) is left unread unless matched
by a directive. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly
determinable other than via the %n directive.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 16 -->
The fwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the function returns the number of input items
wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions (<a href="#7.24.4.1.2">7.24.4.1.2</a>), the wcrtomb
function (<a href="#7.24.6.3.3">7.24.6.3.3</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note288" href="#note288">288)</a> These white-space wide characters are not counted against a specified field width.
</small>
<p><small><a name="note289" href="#note289">289)</a> fwscanf pushes back at most one input wide character onto the input stream. Therefore, some
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.2.3" href="#7.24.2.3">7.24.2.3 The swprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
size_t n,
const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The swprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf, except that the argument s
specifies an array of wide characters into which the generated output is to be written,
rather than written to a stream. No more than n wide characters are written, including a
terminating null wide character, which is always added (unless n is zero).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The swprintf function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not
counting the terminating null wide character, or a negative value if an encoding error
occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be written.
<h5><a name="7.24.2.4" href="#7.24.2.4">7.24.2.4 The swscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int swscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s,
const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The swscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf, except that the argument s specifies a
wide string from which the input is to be obtained, rather than from a stream. Reaching
the end of the wide string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fwscanf
function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The swscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the swscanf function returns the number of input
<!--page 375 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.2.5" href="#7.24.2.5">7.24.2.5 The vfwprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vfwprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfwprintf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note291"><b>291)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vfwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a
negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.
<!--page 376 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note291" href="#note291">291)</a> As the functions vfwprintf, vswprintf, vfwscanf, vwprintf, vwscanf, and vswscanf
invoke the va_arg macro, the value of arg after the return is indeterminate.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.2.6" href="#7.24.2.6">7.24.2.6 The vfwscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vfwscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfwscanf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note291"><b>291)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vfwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the vfwscanf function returns the number of input
early matching failure.
<h5><a name="7.24.2.7" href="#7.24.2.7">7.24.2.7 The vswprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vswprintf function is equivalent to swprintf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswprintf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note291"><b>291)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vswprintf function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not
counting the terminating null wide character, or a negative value if an encoding error
<!--page 377 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.2.8" href="#7.24.2.8">7.24.2.8 The vswscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vswscanf function is equivalent to swscanf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswscanf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note291"><b>291)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vswscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the vswscanf function returns the number of input
early matching failure.
<h5><a name="7.24.2.9" href="#7.24.2.9">7.24.2.9 The vwprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
int vwprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vwprintf function is equivalent to wprintf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwprintf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note291"><b>291)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
value if an output or encoding error occurred.
<!--page 378 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.2.10" href="#7.24.2.10">7.24.2.10 The vwscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.15"><stdarg.h></a>
int vwscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The vwscanf function is equivalent to wscanf, with the variable argument list
replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and
possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwscanf function does not invoke the
va_end macro.<sup><a href="#note291"><b>291)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The vwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the vwscanf function returns the number of input
early matching failure.
<h5><a name="7.24.2.11" href="#7.24.2.11">7.24.2.11 The wprintf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int wprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf with the argument stdout
interposed before the arguments to wprintf.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative
value if an output or encoding error occurred.
<h5><a name="7.24.2.12" href="#7.24.2.12">7.24.2.12 The wscanf function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int wscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf with the argument stdin interposed
before the arguments to wscanf.
<!--page 379 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs
before any conversion. Otherwise, the wscanf function returns the number of input
<h4><a name="7.24.3" href="#7.24.3">7.24.3 Wide character input/output functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.24.3.1" href="#7.24.3.1">7.24.3.1 The fgetwc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wint_t fgetwc(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by stream is not set and a
next wide character is present, the fgetwc function obtains that wide character as a
wchar_t converted to a wint_t and advances the associated file position indicator for
the stream (if defined).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is at end-of-file, the end-
of-file indicator for the stream is set and the fgetwc function returns WEOF. Otherwise,
function returns WEOF. If an encoding error occurs (including too few bytes), the value of
the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno and the fgetwc function returns WEOF.<sup><a href="#note292"><b>292)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note292" href="#note292">292)</a> An end-of-file and a read error can be distinguished by use of the feof and ferror functions.
Also, errno will be set to EILSEQ by input/output functions only if an encoding error occurs.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.3.2" href="#7.24.3.2">7.24.3.2 The fgetws function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
wchar_t *fgetws(wchar_t * restrict s,
int n, FILE * restrict stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fgetws function reads at most one less than the number of wide characters
specified by n from the stream pointed to by stream into the array pointed to by s. No
additional wide characters are read after a new-line wide character (which is retained) or
after end-of-file. A null wide character is written immediately after the last wide
character read into the array.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fgetws function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no
characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a
contents are indeterminate and a null pointer is returned.
<h5><a name="7.24.3.3" href="#7.24.3.3">7.24.3.3 The fputwc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wint_t fputwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fputwc function writes the wide character specified by c to the output stream
pointed to by stream, at the position indicated by the associated file position indicator
for the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator appropriately. If the file cannot
support positioning requests, or if the stream was opened with append mode, the
character is appended to the output stream.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fputwc function returns the wide character written. If a write error occurs, the
error indicator for the stream is set and fputwc returns WEOF. If an encoding error
occurs, the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno and fputwc returns WEOF.
<h5><a name="7.24.3.4" href="#7.24.3.4">7.24.3.4 The fputws function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
int fputws(const wchar_t * restrict s,
FILE * restrict stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fputws function writes the wide string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by
stream. The terminating null wide character is not written.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fputws function returns EOF if a write or encoding error occurs; otherwise, it
returns a nonnegative value.
<!--page 381 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.3.5" href="#7.24.3.5">7.24.3.5 The fwide function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int fwide(FILE *stream, int mode);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The fwide function determines the orientation of the stream pointed to by stream. If
mode is greater than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream wide oriented. If
mode is less than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream byte oriented.<sup><a href="#note293"><b>293)</b></a></sup>
Otherwise, mode is zero and the function does not alter the orientation of the stream.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The fwide function returns a value greater than zero if, after the call, the stream has
wide orientation, a value less than zero if the stream has byte orientation, or zero if the
stream has no orientation.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note293" href="#note293">293)</a> If the orientation of the stream has already been determined, fwide does not change it.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.3.6" href="#7.24.3.6">7.24.3.6 The getwc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wint_t getwc(FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The getwc function is equivalent to fgetwc, except that if it is implemented as a
macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so the argument should never be an
expression with side effects.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The getwc function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to by
stream, or WEOF.
<h5><a name="7.24.3.7" href="#7.24.3.7">7.24.3.7 The getwchar function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
<!--page 382 -->
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The getwchar function is equivalent to getwc with the argument stdin.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The getwchar function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to
by stdin, or WEOF.
<h5><a name="7.24.3.8" href="#7.24.3.8">7.24.3.8 The putwc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wint_t putwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The putwc function is equivalent to fputwc, except that if it is implemented as a
macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so that argument should never be an
expression with side effects.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The putwc function returns the wide character written, or WEOF.
<h5><a name="7.24.3.9" href="#7.24.3.9">7.24.3.9 The putwchar function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wint_t putwchar(wchar_t c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The putwchar function is equivalent to putwc with the second argument stdout.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The putwchar function returns the character written, or WEOF.
<h5><a name="7.24.3.10" href="#7.24.3.10">7.24.3.10 The ungetwc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wint_t ungetwc(wint_t c, FILE *stream);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The ungetwc function pushes the wide character specified by c back onto the input
stream pointed to by stream. Pushed-back wide characters will be returned by
back. For a text or binary stream, the value of its file position indicator after a successful
call to the ungetwc function is unspecified until all pushed-back wide characters are
read or discarded.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 6 -->
The ungetwc function returns the wide character pushed back, or WEOF if the operation
fails.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.1" href="#7.24.4.1">7.24.4.1 Wide string numeric conversion functions</a></h5>
<h5><a name="7.24.4.1.1" href="#7.24.4.1.1">7.24.4.1.1 The wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
long double wcstold(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions convert the initial portion of the wide
string pointed to by nptr to double, float, and long double representation,
If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
that endptr is not a null pointer.
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form, FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, and
the result is not exactly representable, the result should be one of the two numbers in the
correctly rounding L and U according to the current rounding direction, with the extra
stipulation that the error with respect to D should have a correct sign for the current
rounding direction.<sup><a href="#note296"><b>296)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 10 -->
The functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed,
zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable values, plus or
<!--page 387 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note294" href="#note294">294)</a> It is unspecified whether a minus-signed sequence is converted to a negative number directly or by
negating the value resulting from converting the corresponding unsigned sequence (see <a href="#F.5">F.5</a>); the two
methods may yield different results if rounding is toward positive or negative infinity. In either case,
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.4.1.2" href="#7.24.4.1.2">7.24.4.1.2 The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t ** restrict endptr,
int base);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions convert the initial
portion of the wide string pointed to by nptr to long int, long long int,
If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is
performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided
that endptr is not a null pointer.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 8 -->
The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions return the converted
value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value
<h5><a name="7.24.4.2" href="#7.24.4.2">7.24.4.2 Wide string copying functions</a></h5>
<h5><a name="7.24.4.2.1" href="#7.24.4.2.1">7.24.4.2.1 The wcscpy function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wcscpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,
const wchar_t * restrict s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcscpy function copies the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating
null wide character) into the array pointed to by s1.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcscpy function returns the value of s1.
<!--page 389 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.4.2.2" href="#7.24.4.2.2">7.24.4.2.2 The wcsncpy function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsncpy function copies not more than n wide characters (those that follow a null
wide character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by
If the array pointed to by s2 is a wide string that is shorter than n wide characters, null
wide characters are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1, until n wide
characters in all have been written.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The wcsncpy function returns the value of s1.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note297" href="#note297">297)</a> Thus, if there is no null wide character in the first n wide characters of the array pointed to by s2, the
result will not be null-terminated.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.4.2.3" href="#7.24.4.2.3">7.24.4.2.3 The wmemcpy function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wmemcpy function copies n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 to the
object pointed to by s1.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wmemcpy function returns the value of s1.
<!--page 390 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.4.2.4" href="#7.24.4.2.4">7.24.4.2.4 The wmemmove function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wmemmove(wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wmemmove function copies n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 to
the object pointed to by s1. Copying takes place as if the n wide characters from the
object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n wide characters that
does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 or s2, and then the n wide characters from
the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wmemmove function returns the value of s1.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.3" href="#7.24.4.3">7.24.4.3 Wide string concatenation functions</a></h5>
<h5><a name="7.24.4.3.1" href="#7.24.4.3.1">7.24.4.3.1 The wcscat function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wcscat(wchar_t * restrict s1,
const wchar_t * restrict s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcscat function appends a copy of the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the
terminating null wide character) to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial
wide character of s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcscat function returns the value of s1.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.3.2" href="#7.24.4.3.2">7.24.4.3.2 The wcsncat function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsncat function appends not more than n wide characters (a null wide character
and those that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of
the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial wide character of s2 overwrites the null
wide character at the end of s1. A terminating null wide character is always appended to
the result.<sup><a href="#note298"><b>298)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcsncat function returns the value of s1.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note298" href="#note298">298)</a> Thus, the maximum number of wide characters that can end up in the array pointed to by s1 is
wcslen(s1)+n+1.
</small>
by wchar_t.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.4.1" href="#7.24.4.4.1">7.24.4.4.1 The wcscmp function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int wcscmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcscmp function compares the wide string pointed to by s1 to the wide string
pointed to by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcscmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
accordingly as the wide string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the
wide string pointed to by s2.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.4.2" href="#7.24.4.4.2">7.24.4.4.2 The wcscoll function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int wcscoll(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcscoll function compares the wide string pointed to by s1 to the wide string
pointed to by s2, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the
current locale.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcscoll function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
accordingly as the wide string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the
locale.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.4.3" href="#7.24.4.4.3">7.24.4.4.3 The wcsncmp function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int wcsncmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsncmp function compares not more than n wide characters (those that follow a
null wide character are not compared) from the array pointed to by s1 to the array
pointed to by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcsncmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
accordingly as the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal
to, or less than the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s2.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.4.4" href="#7.24.4.4.4">7.24.4.4.4 The wcsxfrm function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsxfrm function transforms the wide string pointed to by s2 and places the
resulting wide string into the array pointed to by s1. The transformation is such that if
applied to the same two original wide strings. No more than n wide characters are placed
into the resulting array pointed to by s1, including the terminating null wide character. If
n is zero, s1 is permitted to be a null pointer.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcsxfrm function returns the length of the transformed wide string (not including
the terminating null wide character). If the value returned is n or greater, the contents of
<h5><a name="7.24.4.4.5" href="#7.24.4.4.5">7.24.4.4.5 The wmemcmp function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int wmemcmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wmemcmp function compares the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by
s1 to the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wmemcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero,
accordingly as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the object
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5" href="#7.24.4.5">7.24.4.5 Wide string search functions</a></h5>
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5.1" href="#7.24.4.5.1">7.24.4.5.1 The wcschr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wcschr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcschr function locates the first occurrence of c in the wide string pointed to by s.
The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide string.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcschr function returns a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if
the wide character does not occur in the wide string.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5.2" href="#7.24.4.5.2">7.24.4.5.2 The wcscspn function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
size_t wcscspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcscspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the wide
string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of wide characters not from the wide
string pointed to by s2.
<!--page 394 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcscspn function returns the length of the segment.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5.3" href="#7.24.4.5.3">7.24.4.5.3 The wcspbrk function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wcspbrk(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcspbrk function locates the first occurrence in the wide string pointed to by s1 of
any wide character from the wide string pointed to by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcspbrk function returns a pointer to the wide character in s1, or a null pointer if
no wide character from s2 occurs in s1.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5.4" href="#7.24.4.5.4">7.24.4.5.4 The wcsrchr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wcsrchr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsrchr function locates the last occurrence of c in the wide string pointed to by
s. The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide string.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcsrchr function returns a pointer to the wide character, or a null pointer if c does
not occur in the wide string.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5.5" href="#7.24.4.5.5">7.24.4.5.5 The wcsspn function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
size_t wcsspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the wide
string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of wide characters from the wide string
pointed to by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcsspn function returns the length of the segment.
<!--page 395 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5.6" href="#7.24.4.5.6">7.24.4.5.6 The wcsstr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wcsstr(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsstr function locates the first occurrence in the wide string pointed to by s1 of
the sequence of wide characters (excluding the terminating null wide character) in the
wide string pointed to by s2.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcsstr function returns a pointer to the located wide string, or a null pointer if the
wide string is not found. If s2 points to a wide string with zero length, the function
returns s1.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5.7" href="#7.24.4.5.7">7.24.4.5.7 The wcstok function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict s2,
wchar_t ** restrict ptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A sequence of calls to the wcstok function breaks the wide string pointed to by s1 into
a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a wide character from the wide string
by ptr so that subsequent calls, with a null pointer for s1 and the unmodified pointer
value for ptr, shall start searching just past the element overwritten by a null wide
character (if any).
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 7 -->
The wcstok function returns a pointer to the first wide character of a token, or a null
pointer if there is no token.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.5.8" href="#7.24.4.5.8">7.24.4.5.8 The wmemchr function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wmemchr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c,
size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wmemchr function locates the first occurrence of c in the initial n wide characters of
the object pointed to by s.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wmemchr function returns a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if
the wide character does not occur in the object.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.6" href="#7.24.4.6">7.24.4.6 Miscellaneous functions</a></h5>
<h5><a name="7.24.4.6.1" href="#7.24.4.6.1">7.24.4.6.1 The wcslen function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
size_t wcslen(const wchar_t *s);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcslen function computes the length of the wide string pointed to by s.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wcslen function returns the number of wide characters that precede the terminating
null wide character.
<h5><a name="7.24.4.6.2" href="#7.24.4.6.2">7.24.4.6.2 The wmemset function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t *wmemset(wchar_t *s, wchar_t c, size_t n);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wmemset function copies the value of c into each of the first n wide characters of
the object pointed to by s.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wmemset function returns the value of s.
<h4><a name="7.24.5" href="#7.24.5">7.24.5 Wide character time conversion functions</a></h4>
<h5><a name="7.24.5.1" href="#7.24.5.1">7.24.5.1 The wcsftime function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.23"><time.h></a>
const wchar_t * restrict format,
const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsftime function is equivalent to the strftime function, except that:
<ul>
corresponding sequences of wide characters.
<li> The return value indicates the number of wide characters.
</ul>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the total number of resulting wide characters including the terminating null wide
character is not more than maxsize, the wcsftime function returns the number of
<!--page 399 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note299" href="#note299">299)</a> Thus, a particular mbstate_t object can be used, for example, with both the mbrtowc and
mbsrtowcs functions as long as they are used to step sequentially through the same multibyte
character string.
<h5><a name="7.24.6.1" href="#7.24.6.1">7.24.6.1 Single-byte/wide character conversion functions</a></h5>
<h5><a name="7.24.6.1.1" href="#7.24.6.1.1">7.24.6.1.1 The btowc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wint_t btowc(int c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The btowc function determines whether c constitutes a valid single-byte character in the
initial shift state.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The btowc function returns WEOF if c has the value EOF or if (unsigned char)c
does not constitute a valid single-byte character in the initial shift state. Otherwise, it
returns the wide character representation of that character.
<h5><a name="7.24.6.1.2" href="#7.24.6.1.2">7.24.6.1.2 The wctob function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.19"><stdio.h></a>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int wctob(wint_t c);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wctob function determines whether c corresponds to a member of the extended
character set whose multibyte character representation is a single byte when in the initial
shift state.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The wctob function returns EOF if c does not correspond to a multibyte character with
length one in the initial shift state. Otherwise, it returns the single-byte representation of
<h5><a name="7.24.6.2" href="#7.24.6.2">7.24.6.2 Conversion state functions</a></h5>
<h5><a name="7.24.6.2.1" href="#7.24.6.2.1">7.24.6.2.1 The mbsinit function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
int mbsinit(const mbstate_t *ps);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If ps is not a null pointer, the mbsinit function determines whether the pointed-to
mbstate_t object describes an initial conversion state.
<!--page 400 -->
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The mbsinit function returns nonzero if ps is a null pointer or if the pointed-to object
describes an initial conversion state; otherwise, it returns zero.
encoding is state-dependent.
<h5><a name="7.24.6.3.1" href="#7.24.6.3.1">7.24.6.3.1 The mbrlen function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
size_t n,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The mbrlen function is equivalent to the call:
<pre>
</pre>
where internal is the mbstate_t object for the mbrlen function, except that the
expression designated by ps is evaluated only once.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
The mbrlen function returns a value between zero and n, inclusive, (size_t)(-2),
or (size_t)(-1).
<!--page 401 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.6.3.2" href="#7.24.6.3.2">7.24.6.3.2 The mbrtowc function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
size_t n,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If s is a null pointer, the mbrtowc function is equivalent to the call:
<pre>
corresponding wide character and then, if pwc is not a null pointer, stores that value in
the object pointed to by pwc. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide
character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The mbrtowc function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current
conversion state):
</dl>
<!--page 402 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note300" href="#note300">300)</a> When n has at least the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro, this case can only occur if s points at a
sequence of redundant shift sequences (for implementations with state-dependent encodings).
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.6.3.3" href="#7.24.6.3.3">7.24.6.3.3 The wcrtomb function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
wchar_t wc,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
If s is a null pointer, the wcrtomb function is equivalent to the call
<pre>
array whose first element is pointed to by s. At most MB_CUR_MAX bytes are stored. If
wc is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed
to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The wcrtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including
any shift sequences). When wc is not a valid wide character, an encoding error occurs:
<!--page 403 -->
<h5><a name="7.24.6.4.1" href="#7.24.6.4.1">7.24.6.4.1 The mbsrtowcs function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
size_t len,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The mbsrtowcs function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the
conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps, from the array indirectly
just past the last multibyte character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
reaching a terminating null character and if dst is not a null pointer, the resulting state
described is the initial conversion state.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If the input conversion encounters a sequence of bytes that do not form a valid multibyte
character, an encoding error occurs: the mbsrtowcs function stores the value of the
<!--page 404 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note301" href="#note301">301)</a> Thus, the value of len is ignored if dst is a null pointer.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.24.6.4.2" href="#7.24.6.4.2">7.24.6.4.2 The wcsrtombs function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.24"><wchar.h></a>
size_t len,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wcsrtombs function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array
indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that
address just past the last wide character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to
reaching a terminating null wide character, the resulting state described is the initial
conversion state.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If conversion stops because a wide character is reached that does not correspond to a
valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the wcsrtombs function stores the
<!--page 405 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note302" href="#note302">302)</a> If conversion stops because a terminating null wide character has been reached, the bytes stored
include those necessary to reach the initial shift state immediately before the null byte.
</small>
<!--page 406 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note303" href="#note303">303)</a> See ''future library directions'' (<a href="#7.26.13">7.26.13</a>).
</small>
both printing and white-space wide characters.<sup><a href="#note304"><b>304)</b></a></sup>
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the wctob function (<a href="#7.24.6.1.2">7.24.6.1.2</a>).
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note304" href="#note304">304)</a> For example, if the expression isalpha(wctob(wc)) evaluates to true, then the call
iswalpha(wc) also returns true. But, if the expression isgraph(wctob(wc)) evaluates to true
(which cannot occur for wc == L' ' of course), then either iswgraph(wc) or iswprint(wc)
</small>
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.1" href="#7.25.2.1.1">7.25.2.1.1 The iswalnum function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswalnum(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswalnum function tests for any wide character for which iswalpha or
iswdigit is true.
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.2" href="#7.25.2.1.2">7.25.2.1.2 The iswalpha function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswalpha(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswalpha function tests for any wide character for which iswupper or
iswlower is true, or any wide character that is one of a locale-specific set of alphabetic
wide characters for which none of iswcntrl, iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace
is true.<sup><a href="#note305"><b>305)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note305" href="#note305">305)</a> The functions iswlower and iswupper test true or false separately for each of these additional
wide characters; all four combinations are possible.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.3" href="#7.25.2.1.3">7.25.2.1.3 The iswblank function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswblank(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswblank function tests for any wide character that is a standard blank wide
character or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which iswspace is true
locale, iswblank returns true only for the standard blank characters.
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.4" href="#7.25.2.1.4">7.25.2.1.4 The iswcntrl function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswcntrl(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswcntrl function tests for any control wide character.
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.5" href="#7.25.2.1.5">7.25.2.1.5 The iswdigit function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswdigit(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswdigit function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a decimal-digit
character (as defined in <a href="#5.2.1">5.2.1</a>).
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.6" href="#7.25.2.1.6">7.25.2.1.6 The iswgraph function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
<!--page 408 -->
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswgraph function tests for any wide character for which iswprint is true and
iswspace is false.<sup><a href="#note306"><b>306)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note306" href="#note306">306)</a> Note that the behavior of the iswgraph and iswpunct functions may differ from their
corresponding functions in <a href="#7.4.1">7.4.1</a> with respect to printing, white-space, single-byte execution
characters other than ' '.
</small>
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.7" href="#7.25.2.1.7">7.25.2.1.7 The iswlower function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswlower(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswlower function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a lowercase
letter or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which none of iswcntrl,
iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.8" href="#7.25.2.1.8">7.25.2.1.8 The iswprint function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswprint(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswprint function tests for any printing wide character.
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.9" href="#7.25.2.1.9">7.25.2.1.9 The iswpunct function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswpunct(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswpunct function tests for any printing wide character that is one of a locale-
specific set of punctuation wide characters for which neither iswspace nor iswalnum
is true.<sup><a href="#note306"><b>306)</b></a></sup>
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.10" href="#7.25.2.1.10">7.25.2.1.10 The iswspace function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
<!--page 409 -->
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswspace function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a locale-specific
set of white-space wide characters for which none of iswalnum, iswgraph, or
iswpunct is true.
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.11" href="#7.25.2.1.11">7.25.2.1.11 The iswupper function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswupper(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswupper function tests for any wide character that corresponds to an uppercase
letter or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which none of iswcntrl,
iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.
<h5><a name="7.25.2.1.12" href="#7.25.2.1.12">7.25.2.1.12 The iswxdigit function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswxdigit(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswxdigit function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a
hexadecimal-digit character (as defined in <a href="#6.4.4.1">6.4.4.1</a>).
subclause (<a href="#7.25.2.1">7.25.2.1</a>).
<h5><a name="7.25.2.2.1" href="#7.25.2.2.1">7.25.2.2.1 The iswctype function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
int iswctype(wint_t wc, wctype_t desc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The iswctype function determines whether the wide character wc has the property
described by desc. The current setting of the LC_CTYPE category shall be the same as
iswctype(wc, wctype("upper")) // iswupper(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("xdigit")) // iswxdigit(wc)
</pre>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The iswctype function returns nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the wide
character wc has the property described by desc.
<p><b> Forward references</b>: the wctype function (<a href="#7.25.2.2.2">7.25.2.2.2</a>).
<h5><a name="7.25.2.2.2" href="#7.25.2.2.2">7.25.2.2.2 The wctype function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
wctype_t wctype(const char *property);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wctype function constructs a value with type wctype_t that describes a class of
wide characters identified by the string argument property.
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strings listed in the description of the iswctype function shall be valid in all
locales as property arguments to the wctype function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If property identifies a valid class of wide characters according to the LC_CTYPE
category of the current locale, the wctype function returns a nonzero value that is valid
<h5><a name="7.25.3.1" href="#7.25.3.1">7.25.3.1 Wide character case mapping functions</a></h5>
<h5><a name="7.25.3.1.1" href="#7.25.3.1.1">7.25.3.1.1 The towlower function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
wint_t towlower(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The towlower function converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the argument is a wide character for which iswupper is true and there are one or
more corresponding wide characters, as specified by the current locale, for which
returned unchanged.
<h5><a name="7.25.3.1.2" href="#7.25.3.1.2">7.25.3.1.2 The towupper function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
wint_t towupper(wint_t wc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The towupper function converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 3 -->
If the argument is a wide character for which iswlower is true and there are one or
more corresponding wide characters, as specified by the current locale, for which
<!--page 412 -->
<h5><a name="7.25.3.2.1" href="#7.25.3.2.1">7.25.3.2.1 The towctrans function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
wint_t towctrans(wint_t wc, wctrans_t desc);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The towctrans function maps the wide character wc using the mapping described by
desc. The current setting of the LC_CTYPE category shall be the same as during the call
towctrans(wc, wctrans("tolower")) // towlower(wc)
towctrans(wc, wctrans("toupper")) // towupper(wc)
</pre>
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
The towctrans function returns the mapped value of wc using the mapping described
by desc.
<h5><a name="7.25.3.2.2" href="#7.25.3.2.2">7.25.3.2.2 The wctrans function</a></h5>
-<h6>Synopsis</h6>
+<p><b>Synopsis</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
<pre>
#include <a href="#7.25"><wctype.h></a>
wctrans_t wctrans(const char *property);
</pre>
-<h6>Description</h6>
+<p><b>Description</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The wctrans function constructs a value with type wctrans_t that describes a
mapping between wide characters identified by the string argument property.
<p><!--para 3 -->
The strings listed in the description of the towctrans function shall be valid in all
locales as property arguments to the wctrans function.
-<h6>Returns</h6>
+<p><b>Returns</b>
<p><!--para 4 -->
If property identifies a valid mapping of wide characters according to the LC_CTYPE
category of the current locale, the wctrans function returns a nonzero value that is valid
</ul>
Any non-IEC 60559 extended format used for the long double type shall have more
precision than IEC 60559 double and at least the range of IEC 60559 double.<sup><a href="#note308"><b>308)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The long double type should match an IEC 60559 extended format.
<!--page 457 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note307" href="#note307">307)</a> ''Extended'' is IEC 60559's double-extended data format. Extended refers to both the common 80-bit
and quadruple 128-bit IEC 60559 formats.
</small>
the term NaN to denote quiet NaNs. The NAN and INFINITY macros and the nan
functions in <a href="#7.12"><math.h></a> provide designations for IEC 60559 NaNs and infinities.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note309" href="#note309">309)</a> Since NaNs created by IEC 60559 operations are always quiet, quiet NaNs (along with infinities) are
sufficient for closure of the arithmetic.
</small>
integral part is within the range of the integer type raises the ''inexact'' floating-point
exception is unspecified.<sup><a href="#note310"><b>310)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note310" href="#note310">310)</a> ANSI/IEEE 854, but not IEC 60559 (ANSI/IEEE 754), directly specifies that floating-to-integer
conversions raise the ''inexact'' floating-point exception for non-integer in-range values. In those
cases where it matters, library functions can be used to effect such conversions with or without raising
<!--page 460 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note311" href="#note311">311)</a> If the minimum-width IEC 60559 extended format (64 bits of precision) is supported,
DECIMAL_DIG shall be at least 21. If IEC 60559 double (53 bits of precision) is the widest
IEC 60559 format supported, then DECIMAL_DIG shall be at least 17. (By contrast, LDBL_DIG and
A contracted expression treats infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and the
rounding directions in a manner consistent with the basic arithmetic operations covered
by IEC 60559.
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
A contracted expression should raise floating-point exceptions in a manner generally
consistent with the basic arithmetic operations. A contracted expression should deliver
IEC 60559 dynamic rounding precision and trap enablement modes, if the
implementation supports them.<sup><a href="#note312"><b>312)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note312" href="#note312">312)</a> This specification does not require dynamic rounding precision nor trap enablement modes.
</small>
<a href="#7.6"><fenv.h></a>) is ''on'', these changes to the floating-point state are treated as side effects
which respect sequence points.<sup><a href="#note313"><b>313)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note313" href="#note313">313)</a> If the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''off'', the implementation is free to assume the floating-
point control modes will be the default ones and the floating-point status flags will not be tested,
which allows certain optimizations (see <a href="#F.8">F.8</a>).
<li> The rounding precision mode (if supported) is set so that results are not shortened.
<li> Trapping or stopping (if supported) is disabled on all floating-point exceptions.
</ul>
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 2 -->
The implementation should produce a diagnostic message for each translation-time
floating-point exception, other than ''inexact'';<sup><a href="#note314"><b>314)</b></a></sup> the implementation should then
proceed with the translation of the program.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note314" href="#note314">314)</a> As floating constants are converted to appropriate internal representations at translation time, their
conversion is subject to default rounding modes and raises no execution-time floating-point exceptions
(even where the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''on''). Library functions, for example
execution time.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note315" href="#note315">315)</a> Where the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma is ''on'', results of inexact expressions like 1.0/3.0
are affected by rounding modes set at execution time, and expressions such as 0.0/0.0 and
1.0/0.0 generate execution-time floating-point exceptions. The programmer can achieve the
<!--page 463 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note316" href="#note316">316)</a> Use of float_t and double_t variables increases the likelihood of translation-time computation.
For example, the automatic initialization
(unless rounding is downward).
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note317" href="#note317">317)</a> Strict support for signaling NaNs -- not required by this specification -- would invalidate these and
other transformations that remove arithmetic operators.
</small>
precision modes shall assure further that the result of the operation raises no floating-
point exception when converted to the semantic type of the operation.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note319" href="#note319">319)</a> 0 - 0 yields -0 instead of +0 just when the rounding direction is downward.
</small>
For families of functions, the specifications apply to all of the functions even though only
the principal function is shown. Unless otherwise specified, where the symbol ''(+-)''
occurs in both an argument and the result, the result has the same sign as the argument.
-<h6>Recommended practice</h6>
+<p><b>Recommended practice</b>
<p><!--para 13 -->
If a function with one or more NaN arguments returns a NaN result, the result should be
the same as one of the NaN arguments (after possible type conversion), except perhaps
for the sign.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note320" href="#note320">320)</a> IEC 60559 allows different definitions of underflow. They all result in the same values, but differ on
when the floating-point exception is raised.
</small>
<li> atan2((+-)(inf), +(inf)) returns (+-)pi /4.
</ul>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note322" href="#note322">322)</a> atan2(0, 0) does not raise the ''invalid'' floating-point exception, nor does atan2( y , 0) raise
the ''divide-by-zero'' floating-point exception.
</small>
isnan(y)) ? x : y; }
</pre>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note323" href="#note323">323)</a> Ideally, fmax would be sensitive to the sign of zero, for example fmax(-0.0, +0.0) would
return +0; however, implementation in software might be impractical.
</small>
When a value of real type is converted to an imaginary type, the result is a positive
imaginary zero.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note324" href="#note324">324)</a> See <a href="#6.3.1.2">6.3.1.2</a>.
</small>
<!--page 481 -->
<h4><a name="G.5.1" href="#G.5.1">G.5.1 Multiplicative operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
If one operand has real type and the other operand has imaginary type, then the result has
imaginary type. If both operands have imaginary type, then the result has real type. (If
with division, provides better roundoff characteristics.
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note325" href="#note325">325)</a> These properties are already implied for those cases covered in the tables, but are required for all cases
(at least where the state for CX_LIMITED_RANGE is ''off'').
</small>
<h4><a name="G.5.2" href="#G.5.2">G.5.2 Additive operators</a></h4>
-<h6>Semantics</h6>
+<p><b>Semantics</b>
<p><!--para 1 -->
If both operands have imaginary type, then the result has imaginary type. (If one operand
has real type and the other operand has imaginary type, or if either operand has complex
<!--page 486 -->
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note326" href="#note326">326)</a> As noted in <a href="#G.3">G.3</a>, a complex value with at least one infinite part is regarded as an infinity even if its
other part is a NaN.
</small>
The cpow functions raise floating-point exceptions if appropriate for the calculation of
the parts of the result, and may raise spurious exceptions.<sup><a href="#note327"><b>327)</b></a></sup>
-<h6>footnotes</h6>
+<p><b>Footnotes</b>
<p><small><a name="note327" href="#note327">327)</a> This allows cpow( z , c ) to be implemented as cexp(c clog( z )) without precluding
implementations that treat special cases more carefully.
</small>
projects / c-standard / blobdiff